31B-247 (3) Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein
without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor
insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4"back of
finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with
covers.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
W A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.6 TESTING
A. Balancing Loads:
1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed
equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall
be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main
distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if
requested by the Public Works Department.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-19
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
aw.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current carrying metallic
parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-
metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The
ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment. ..
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed
under this Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and
equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of
connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved
termination where required, conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code
and other applicable specification standards.
D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of
flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other
equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire ,
shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture,motor and other equipment components
by means of positively secured ground clamp in each.
3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more
than the equivalent of three 900 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary,
the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably
protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. *�
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to
junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit
1-1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit
to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with .,
cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at
ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished
floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall
mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height
shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor,
unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall
check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes,where exposed to the weather and wet locations,shall be of the
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -18 �'
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
w� d. Formalized As-built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant,
component and node locations.
e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's
reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the
original design.
2.11 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet)
A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed(including
!! cabling)by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a
call switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series.
C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel
! * plate marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6)long nylon pull cord.
D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime
tone; flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all
required transformers.
E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal
cancellation must be made at the point of origin.
PART 3 -INSTALLATION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner
as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual
measurements and those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades
might interfere with his,the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the
plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has
been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The
entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code
and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be
! made accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-17
"M
■o
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Rim
2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the
work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of
the acceptance tests.
R. Testing and Inspection
1. Test and inspect all parts of the work provided under this Section and as required
by codes, standard or authorities having jurisdiction, and conduct all tests and
inspections to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and all authorities. ..
Notify the Architect and all involved authorities at least one (1) week prior to
testing or inspection. Do not cover work prior to testing or inspection.
2. The Contractor shall certify all twisted pair cable drops with a time domain
reflectometer (TDR) device in order to verify compliance with IEEE
Specifications. The test results for all cable drops must meet or exceed the
following Specifications when tested from each end. .�
a. Compliance with EIA/TIA T569B wiring sequence.
b. Distance: Less than 90 meters.
C. Attenuation at 10.0 MHz: Less than 6.95 dB.
d. Near end crosstalk(NEXT)at 10.0 Mhz: Greater than 44.1)Db.
e. Cable Resistance: Less than 9.4 OHMS(18.8 loopback).
4W
f. Noise: Less than 100 mv.
g. TDR testing will be performed with 10 ft. Category V patch cables; one
at TDR, and one at signal injector. 00
h. Document all data obtained in cable certification process for each drop,
including Outlet IO and Pass/Fail status. ..
S. System Documentation:
1. Prepare and submit four(4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly •
bound as outlined in this Specification.
2. Manual to include:
a. A system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch
points identified.
b. A listing of the As-built cabling and components installed.
C. A record of the dynamic test results,both data communication simulation
and the real time photographs showing the Time Domain Reflectometer
(TDR)measurements of the individual cable segments.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-16 """
PRO
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Install work neatly,with boxes,equipment, etc.,plumb and square. Adjust layout
as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to provide
maximum safety to future operators.
4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable
terminations.
P. Wiring
1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices.
Do not exceed 30%fill in conduit.
2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment.
3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits
exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4"minimum.
4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper. .
a. Pulling tensions.
b. Quantities.
C. Types.
d. Lengths.
e. Routing.
f. Wire group separation.
g. Identification.
5. The interconnection of all equipment requiring shielded cable shall be by Belden
type 9451,or equivalent,unless otherwise specified.
6. All wires shall be permanently identified at each wire end by marking with "E-Z"
tape markers or equivalent.
7. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment.
8. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes,
wireways and wiring troughs,providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie
as required using T&B "Ty-Raps" of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing
between ties to 6", and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once
in each enclosure.
9. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and
equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection.
Q. Acceptance Testing
1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner
during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for
acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum
of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be
completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-15
..
aw
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Contractor. Open and shorted pairs shall be examined to determine if the
problem is caused by faulty termination. If the termination is proper, the bad
pairs shall be tapped at both ends and noted on the punch down sheets.
2. If any data cable contains any bad conductors or pairs, the entire cable shall be
replaced at no charge to the Owner.
3. All terminated UTP cables shall conform to the Specifications for Category 5
cable.
L. Grounding
1. All equipment racks,housings, and raceways shall be grounded.
2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be
connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the
grounding systems conductors in that area.
3. All manufacturers grounding requirements shall be adhered to as a minimum.
M. Labeling
1. Each cable shall be labeled:
a. Where it enters a termination or patch panel.
b. On the front of the patch panel or punch block.
2. Cables shall be labeled using pre-printed or write-on markers with a clear
overwrap to protect the labeling. If pre-printed markers are utilized, the clear
overwrap shall cover the entire legend.
3. All cables will be labeled at both ends,with room number and floor.
N. Field Quality Control
1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the
installation to provide co-ordination of the work of the Division and of other
trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This
person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment
set-up and testing.
O. General Co-ordination(Date and Telephone Wiring)
1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances,
regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited
to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all
items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification.
2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide
fastenings and supports adequate to support loads.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-14 "�
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Furnish and install faceplates, boxes and inserts based on equipment as
manufactured by Hubbell.
1.. Data-Category 5 5110 Series.
2. Voice-FTJ Type
b. Data runs will be punched down (8 wires) to Category V RJ45 patch
panels using EIAJTIA 568B standard.
C. Voice station wires will be punched down to 110 Type blocks.
d. Provide two (2) port faceplates for "Data Only" locations and three (3)
port faceplates for combined voice/data locations.
5. Voice cable to be Category 3.
J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling
1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards
applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings.
a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications
for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when
installing all cables.
2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines:
a. Use of approved wire,cable, and wiring devices.
b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination.
C. Cable marking materials shall be employed throughout the length of each
cable run. The Contractor shall label each cable at the ends and at each
splice/junction point. Contractor shall label cables in accordance with
2.13.M, "Labeling" of this section.
4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls,
and other partitions of building construction.
5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall,
Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull
and label as specified.
K. Testing of Data Cables
1. Each pair and the shield of each cable shall be tested for opens, shorts, grounds,
and pair reversal. Grounded and reversed pairs shall be corrected by the
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-13
so
am
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
no
by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan.
E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and
telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement ow,
Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1)data and one(1)voice drop,run 00
from each outlet location to the Telephone Room.
G. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall jack and patch panel
terminations in Telephone Room.
H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks.
I. Data cabling shall be Category V, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as
manufactured by IBM,Belden,or AT&T.
1. The installed cabling must meet or exceed the following specifications:
a. UTP (unshielded twisted pair), Category V rated, 24 AWG solid bare
CU, PVC jacket,4 pairs.
b. Nominal capacitance at 1 KHZ: 4 PF/FT.
C. Nominal velocity of progragation: 67%
d. Nominal Delay: 1.5 NS/FT.
e. Nominal Condr/D.C.R. at 20 C: 27 OHMS/1000 FT.
f. Characteristic Impedance: 100 OHMS+/- 15%.
2. Frequency Max.Attenuation Min. Crosstalk
1 MHz 6.3 dB/1,000 Ft. 62 dB/1,000 Ft.
4 MHz 13 dB/1,000 Ft. 53 dB/1,000 Ft.
10 MHz 20 dB/1,000 Ft. 47 dB/1,000 Ft.
16 MHz 25 dB/1,000 Ft. 44 dB/1,000 Ft.
20 MHz 28 dB/1,000 Ft. 42 dB/1,000 Ft.
100 MHz 67 dB/1,000 Ft. 32 dB/1,000 Ft.
3. Physical Characteristics
a. Maximum pulling tension: 41 lbs.
b. Minimum bend radius: 2.00 in.
C. Nominal diameter: .217 in.
d. Cable shall be Belden No. 1583A or approved equal.
4. Wall Plates and Connectors
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-12 ""
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without
removing the starter from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit
module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable.
The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector
switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three
melting alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover
of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No
substitutions will be allowed.
go b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor
without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switch in
cover of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509.
No substitutions will be allowed.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter,
fused,with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt.
d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by
others for interlocking purposes.
2.9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor)
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install a complete fire alarm system as shown on
Drawings. All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a
Simplex 4002 system complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus
Security as directed by the Owner.
B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
C. The building shall be wired on a "zone per floor"basis unless otherwise indicated by the
Owner.
2.10 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
A. The building's internal telephone/data system is existing, and will be modified to
accommodate the new building layout as shown on the Drawings and directed by the
Owner.
B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment
mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall remain and be sealed off with plastic
covering during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable.
C. New outlet locations, as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size outlet box, and
cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for telephone, and(1)
for future expansion.
D. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been pre-qualified
w Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical -11
am
,w
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type,
complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps
shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K.
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure. *■►
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on
Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and
standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and
approved by the Architect and Owner.
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting, and controlling devices for motors.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required.
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off'position
with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion . +
and promote cool operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during normal operation
of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being
restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the
contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the
box,not the cover,with positive pad-locking provisions in the"Off'position. 40
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless
NEMA 3R (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-
deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC.
5. Fuses shall be as required.
6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
enclosure.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole
toggle switches as specified, or required.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA
Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose
enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy
contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or
removing starter from panel.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-10 `"'"`
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
boxes to be furnished with blank plates.
1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back
fur wired. To be Leviton Cat.No. 5352-I,or equal.
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898-HGI, or
fW equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with
0 Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat.No. 20-3-5-0, or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground- 20 A, 125 V, side and back wired, Leviton
Cat.No. 5362-IG, or equal.
5. Light Switches, Single Pole-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired, Leviton
Cat.No. 1221-2, or equal.
6. Light Switches, 3 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired,Leviton Cat.
No. 1223-2,or equal.
7. Light Switches, 4 Way- 20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 1224-2,or equal.
8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle,
Leviton Cat.No. 1221-PLR, or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with
matching cord and cap,Leviton,or equal, as follows:
a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No. 279.
b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No.278.
10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy
clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex,
style as chosen by Architect.
11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching
screws. To be Leviton Cat.No. 86000 series, or equal.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting
fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all
respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install
all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and
diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be
replaced.
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system
by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-9
MW
Renovations to Hopkins House Am
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
no
D. Conductors#3 AWG and larger,Type THW, stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be
Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as 4W
specified.
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections. .+
G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire,Triangle/PWC, or equal.
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES ow
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise
noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their use. ..
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the
cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and
gasket.
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. structural conditions.
2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering.
3. device of fixture for which required.
D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed.
E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used.
F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge.
G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and
screws,bonderized paint finished.
H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the
National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes.
1. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company,
General Electric Company,Raco,or approved equal.
2.5 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety
switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw •�
attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval.
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or
more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-8 ""
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
to remain in finishes or be ainted later. Should this area be necessary,ary, the Electrical
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
so
1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS
Am A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
PART 2 -MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs
concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above
floor, and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest
applicable Federal Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or
partitions, raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred
spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the
latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw
._ type.
C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable
equipment to facilitate removal and connections.
E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent
welded fittings.
2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with
applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported
as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the
necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of
the "lay-in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access.
All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked
enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of
types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall
not be used.
B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN, solid.
C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN, stranded.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-7
am
Renovations to Hopkins House "f
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
am
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart,if applicable. am
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE .�
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1)year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective
during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for
the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time
to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports
(ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location ..
for openings,etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to
co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical
Contractor failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new ..
walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit
and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The
Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-6
OR
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
go
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the individual Contractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except
storage rooms,closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the
building.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three(3)copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name
of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents
with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard
binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1 Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
No Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-5
a
am
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with
the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials *�*
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES,AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility *
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the
work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Division 1.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in .�
Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in
the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to
the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
delaying his work and that of other trades.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-4 ..
Wo
00 Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
No G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
00 capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
protected by suitable means.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings
and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his
work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may
make in regard thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to
the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ow A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in
product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in
accordance with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S.
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the
same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical
materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard
requirements, listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details,dimensions,capacities,etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with
4W the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor
ON from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall
remain with the Contractor.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-3
no
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws,rules,
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents
conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract
requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise. .�
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
Aw
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of
his work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising
as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is SIR
agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of
damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and
binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
.m
D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to
his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring .w
such information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames,beams,
supports,inserts, etc.,hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such ..
failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items.
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-2 �*
w Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
on SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1, as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work
under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or
indicated on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit.
2. Feeders.
3. Panelboards.
4. Telephone/Data System
5. Fire Alarm System.
6. Emergency Call For Aid System
7. Wiring devices and plates.
S. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including
final connections to equipment.
9. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
10. Guarantee and instructions.
11. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new
construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and
delivered to such places as designated by the Owner.
12. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation, and
which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
Project No. 99037/50 16100 Electrical-1
Am
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College W.
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP aw
A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building,
and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing
satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall
be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and .�
thoroughly cleaned including coils,plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas
around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction
shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up. "
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match
the adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION ..
A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified
herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of
vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow.
The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and
flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or
snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so MW
that markers are not over 50 feet on center.
C. Each valve, except runout valves,but including control valves,shall be tagged with a brass
disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number,and a valve list shall be provided o
under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve,the service and the valve
and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs 40
to the valves with brass "S"hooks or chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by Am
engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved
nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be
black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high. oft
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section
of these Specifications has been accomplished.
END OF SECTION .
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-38
on
Renovations to Hopkins House
we Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by
litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph
=7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side,the cleaning by the
use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-
leak" compounds to the system.
3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and
prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above
systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified,
indicated on the Drawings,or as directed.
"a B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner.
3.7 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor
regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator
covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the
floor. Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed
with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge
sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes
over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to
the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The
ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge
adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one
piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe
covering.
3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not,
and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC
Contractor and be included in his bid.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-37
AM
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College ..
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the
section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any
insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed.
Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is
not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under
test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs
does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE"
value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services
Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or
replacing components as appropriate,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the
test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence. «.A
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be
removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves. «*
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other
temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting,joint, or
section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other
material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers.
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign
matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall
have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before
erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt
removed. .�
C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium
phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty
gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system
shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system
shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be .�.
given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to
observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall
be repeated.
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-36
04
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
go Northampton,Massachusetts
to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the
HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly
! ' supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets
or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed
and burrs removed.
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or
reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run
of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and
venting.
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces,
shafts,chases,or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above
hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and
clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits,
lighting fixtures,other piping,ducts,and equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future
replacement,removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to
isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment,
shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation,blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all
$0 traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for
additional requirements.
04 G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner.
The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if
required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and
operational.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be
hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all
equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a
time in order to facilitate the construction.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-35
AM
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College A
Northampton, Massachusetts
J. Service and Guarantee: ow
1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from
defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of so
acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all
necessary service,adjusting,and checking during the 12 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period,the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest an
revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project.
00,
.m
PART 3 -INSTAILATI
an
3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating,ventilating, testing, or otherwise w
without filters in place and permission from the Owner.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units am
and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the
units are turned on,and clean filters shall be installed.
3.2 CUTTING,PATCHING AND DRILLING so
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and am
ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting
and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General
Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be S"
checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other
Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the
corrections as his own expense. "*
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC
Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all
holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General
Contractor.
C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a MW
location approved by the Engineer.
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-34
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. Radiators and Unit Heaters
a. Each radiator and unit heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated
40 control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when
temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close.
I. Adjustment and Calibration:
1. On completion of the job,the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate,test,and
adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors,
and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on
systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test
run,and adjusted.
2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests,the entire control and
management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled
4" devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal
devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire
range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy,
simultaneously with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Engineer.
d. Functional test for Owner's benefit,instruction,and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full
operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and
recalibrate as required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering
the function and operation of all control and management system components on
the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This
on manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the
total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for
instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems
40 control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor
acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained,
all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions,
and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits.
40
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-33
40
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms 40
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated
G. Systems Software
1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the
following system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in
a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their
respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort
condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone.
Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided.
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system
components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of
components. It shall also provide a current status of all VO points being
controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in
appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic
representation.
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each
module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by
the program controller as defined in the real time operating system.
3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional ..
mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed
while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode.
The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode,
respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional
mode. .�
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control
functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and
control all functions and sequences within the system.
H. Sequences of Operation:
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by
Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a
specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each
specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the
Drawings.
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-32
No
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
`o Northampton,Massachusetts
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the
W* loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts,
enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium
contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations.
Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.
i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10
billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or
greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million
operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be
20 017-140 017. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays
shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10
milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an
integral part of the relays.
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model
A70HA-1C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall
40 be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber
Colman with Belimo Actuators,Model AF24-S.
1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals
and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers
equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV 10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions
where required.
5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a
token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE
RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS
"a maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all
wiring required for the local site network.
F. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all
the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design
for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a
minimum,include:
a. Complete database entry
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of
operation indicated
am
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary Tables
4
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-31
00
so
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College so
Northampton,Massachusetts
..
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.75°F
over the range of their application.
b. Pressure Instruments so
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a
4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field
checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure,
without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of
full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-
272-2-XX-B-1-2-2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive
accuracy of+ 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated
pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design.
Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure
range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-
acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold
plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls,
Model P-74FA-5-C.
C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1%
of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the
operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts
rated for the specific electrical application.
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of
+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor.
Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without
requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have
dry contact pulse accumulation.
e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or
chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not
to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-
wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to
Veris Industries,Inc.Hawkeye 735.
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range
of 20%to 95%RH,Visala Mod.HMW-40U.
g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads.
Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the
application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field
adjustable.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-30
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-
in local override switch,with setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer
* for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure
Independent VAV operation.
40 h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of
communication,power,and all outputs.
i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600
baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3
amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally
closed, and either dry contact or bussed.
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm
input impedance.
C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor
input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and
an occupancy LED indicator.
4. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy
ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit
accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended
use.
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type
and have an accuracy of+1°F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ.
OR 2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-52°F to
152°F and an accuracy of within +1 OF in this temperature range.
OR
Kele Precon Model ST-O.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of+0.25°F in
!W the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-lOK-2-RSO-RLC
Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override
switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
OR 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25°F in their
range of application.
W
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-29
.ter
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College Am
Northampton,Massachusetts
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the
various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building.
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or
Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be
implemented over fiber optic,twisted pair,or coaxial cable.
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. w
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more
than 100 controllers.
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting
up to 100 controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to
Central Site Workstations,portable computers,or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether
they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct
Digital Control of single zone terminal 14VAC units; air handling units,
fan coil units, exhaust fans,unit ventilators,etc.
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the
Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for
a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In
addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for
connection of a laptop computer.
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line
controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space
temperature until communication with the TNI is restored. ""
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and
commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all
application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-
volatile memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a
battery backup of at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary ..,
type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC-28
Ow
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
w 3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from
terminal strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the "Auto' side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled
by the ATC Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in
temperature control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor
! ! from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power
wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring
shall be defined as follows:
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt
(except for power to the temperature control panels).
b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters,and electric motors.
C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where
required.
d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air
compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from
compressor motor starters to compressor motor.
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and
system performance.
w 1. Global Network Controller-LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device
which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network
(CMnet)and the Global Network(Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks whichgrCw
allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any
combination of up to 100 zone controllers,rooftop unit controllers,and/or
Control Modules.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-27
am
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College AM
Northampton,Massachusetts
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any .w
equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for
review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion ,r,r
schedule.
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or
corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system ..
will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their
final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three(3)sets of"as-built"Drawings,
and one(1)CADD disk of these Drawings. ..
4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that
include: **�
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the
equipment for each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of
equipment.
d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to
be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result
of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of
the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow
diagrams herein required by this specification. '
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application
programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately
accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show
each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The
time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments(fast motion)
or decreased increments(slow motion).
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC *�*
Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system .�.
components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective
devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components,
such as solenoid air valve.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-26
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
6. Provide the following system hardware:
a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules
00
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions
listed in 1/0 Summary Tables.
C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to
perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database
required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the
Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables,
graphics,reports and point summaries.
8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and
perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of
NO this specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation
shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA)
b. National Electric Code(NEC)
C. National Fire Code
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict,the most restrictive shall apply.
Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit
work not conforming to applicable codes.
C. Submittals,Documentation and Acceptance
1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be
submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials,
including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, an
installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring,
routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions,
calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will
function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all
equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-25
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College 4W
Northampton,Massachusetts
the existing software programs. .■
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by
Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices
manufactured by Barber Colman.
4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated
Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a ..�
properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed
in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all
equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in
all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays,
valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control
wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all
connected and properly integrated to the control system.
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic
power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection
shall be extended from the existing system.
,w
6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature
control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall
conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 -Electrical .w
Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have"Lamicoid" as
nameplates,isolated control valves,relays, etc.to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope of Work
.w
1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of
Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC
work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid.
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware,wiring,pneumatic
tubing,computing equipment and software as defined in this specification.
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project.
All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously
been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this
project.
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of
application software,system peripherals,and field hardware.
5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the
project,shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification. MW
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-24
MW
IIIo
Renovations to Hopkins House
,I„ Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Vibration Mountings and Controls,Inc.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as
indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision
for anchoring to building substrate.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment
guides of the following:
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
! ' Metraflex Co.
2.12 STRAINERS
A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the
inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2"
an and smaller shall have screwed ends;2-1/2"and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers
40 for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones,
Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each
strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off.
2.13 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above
plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in
plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12"x 12"); access panels in walls
shall be Karp type DSC-211 "Universal" (12"x 12").
tur
2.14 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated
Logic.
as
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy
management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20,and shall
be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant.
It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing
central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing
master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It
will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating
parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system
graphics,thermal graphs,all to be displayed graphically at the central site(CS)via
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-23
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. .m
14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43. go
16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15.
ow
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
Section 11,Part C,ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. so
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated,provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. op
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with no
SFA-5.8, Section U, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler
metal materials.
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B 16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-
face for steel flanges,unless otherwise indicated.
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
2.11 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with
materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service.
Select packless expansion joints to provide 200%absorption capacity of piping expansion
between anchors.
B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply
phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-
ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems.
Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper +•
positioning.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide expansion compensators
of one of the following:
Flexonics Div.; UOP,Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc. MM
Keflex,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-22
no
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
ON Northampton,Massachusetts
2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40,threaded,cast bronze fittings.
3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgI silver
solder.
4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast
or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan
room equipment and connection to existing lines.
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53,A106 or A120;except comply with ASTM A53 or
A106 where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.
Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade W.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the
following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise
indicated,Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Raised-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9,except ANSI B16.28 for short-
!! radius elbows and returns;rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type
as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney
"Weldolets" or"Threadolets",or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do
not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than
1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full
length(no close-nipples).
OW 9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn
temper for water piping;soft temper for oil piping.
ON 10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
40
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-21
so
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College am
Northampton,Massachusetts
approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to am
exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees
F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall
be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket
laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 4"
adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an
aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands.
.■
8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed
cover,thickness to be as listed below.
Ow
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
1. Hot Water/Supply and Return:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in.
C. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in.
d. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 2 in.
2.10 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality.
Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every
length of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to
ANSI B2.1-1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9,as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping
work.
B. Application
1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and so
Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded,
2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water.
..
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-20
esu .
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be
insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts.
C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all
+w exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in.thick,
6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach
board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All
sm edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard
of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy
finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet
'40 Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber
with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed
where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless
otherwise noted.
F. Pipe Insulation
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall
have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not
exceeding 50,all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for
applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and
smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe
and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation
shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve
e bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on
adjoining insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the
integrity of the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant,
and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe
insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by
Gustin-Bacon,Manville,or other approved equal.
7. All hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up
water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or
W
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-19
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent
galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength
of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable
for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed,
or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so
that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current, which would exist
with metal to metal contact.
am
2.7 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass
through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line
size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve
without gouging.
2.08 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee &
Mason,or equal.
B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger-Grinnell Figure No.20,at 10'intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at C intervals for tubing 1-1/4"or less,
10'intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or
plastic coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within F of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of
pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the �.
elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping;hangers to 4W
be installed outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser so
clamp;to be installed immediately below a coupling.
2.09 INSULATION
A. All air supply,return,and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts
shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory •
applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with
Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with
staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct ,
insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts
exceed 24 in. in width.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-18
0
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger -
Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger -
Stockham Figure G-931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH.
E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316,
steel disc and shaft,Nordel EPT seat,designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted
with lever operator for two position operation.
go F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when
used as balance valves.
10 G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger-Tour&Anderson Series STAF,neoprene
seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 prig
working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 10IF or 118F, G6-H12. Provide open
position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more
above the floor.
H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF,
lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze
top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position
stops for all valves.
I. For 2 in. and smaller-Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson Figure STAD or STA-
D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and
bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all
valves, which are labeled 'Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit
shall be furnished with drain kit.
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco,Williams&Hager,or Smolensky equal to
Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat,
150 psig ASME rated.
2.06 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in
which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black
malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or
0838. In copper and brass piping,they shall be 125 lb.bronze or brass with ground joint.
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints
shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with
graphite applied to both faces.
15600 HVAC-17
Project No.99037/50
■
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
h. tube UV light sensitivity
i. tube capacity and pressure drop
j. tube loop layout patterns
k. tube fastening procedures .�
1. manifold assembly instructions
m. manifold location
n. fitting assembly instructions
o. insulation practices
P. installation method by construction type
q. control applications
r. system start-up procedures
2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in
accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products
utilized.
3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be
supplied by one company,including: PEX tubing, fittings,manifolds, and other
recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete
radiant tubing system. as
2.05 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be
Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following
Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be
Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed.
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all
bronze with iron hand wheel,rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure.
In general,all line service valves are to be gate valves,manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves-Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T.
3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309. .•
4. Drain Valves-Watts No.B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter,cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH.
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows: M„,
1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller- Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger- Stockham
Figure G-620 or G-623.
M"
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-16
taw
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
r Northampton,Massachusetts
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental
go adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts
will assist in-the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system.
40 e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve
and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating
system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to
the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow
complete loop isolation.
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to
indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue
to indicate cooler return water.
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means
of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system.
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4"
NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system
adaptability.
3. Fittings
a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut,
ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to
manifold.
0M
b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" 3/4"
Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should
not require soldering.
D. System Requirements
1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information
shall be included relating to the following:
a. tube handling
b. tube measuring
C. tube cutting
d. tube bending
e. tube repairing
f. tube connections
g. tube solvent sensitivity
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-15
..s
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College ..
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (t2 = time to failure of boiled
sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, ti" (tl = time to failure of
unboiled sample). ..
m. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube
shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90 -,
degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be
as follows:
3/8"tubing 3.0" radius �.
1/2"tubing 3.75"radius
5/8"tubing 4.5" radius
3/4"tubing 5.75"radius
n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than
five(5)feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows:
1. Nominal tubing size.
2. Type of plastic tubing material.
3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9.
4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure
rating is valid. .■,
5. ASTM designation,ASTM F876.
6. Manufacturer's name and production code.
Additional Marking
1. Date of manufacturing. ..
2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726.
3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring
the tubing.
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of
individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide
thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also
include the following features:
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold
configurations and allows for future expansion.
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have
an automatic integrated air vent.
C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall
have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water
temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and
set up of a radiant heating system.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-14
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or
other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the
wall integrity.
f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
!O Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness
3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
1/2" 0.625" 0.070"
5/8" 0.750" 0.083"
3/4" 0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a
density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3.
h. Sustained Pressure:
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum
Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180T psi @ 180°F
3/8" 250 210
1/2" 195 165
5/8" 190 165
3/4" 190 165
i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing
shall be as given.
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum
Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180°F psi @ 180T
3/8" 275 235
1/2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180
3/4" 210 180
j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in
the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM
F876).
k. Degree of Crosslinking: When tested in accordance with 7.9,
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing
material shall be within the range of 65%to 89% inclusive."
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-13
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade
register,off-white finish,with opposed blade damper.
2.4 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM wo
A. Scope of Work
am
1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing
system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection,
distribution manifolds and associated fittings. ,.
B. References
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876,
entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX) Tubing".
2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877
entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water
Distribution Systems". ••
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water
floor heating systems".
C. Materials
1. Tube
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance
with ASTM F876.
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using
the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient
temperature and pressure.
C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working
pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working
temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature.
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX
tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and
materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for
"Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs:
e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially
uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and
outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-12
wo
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made
with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return,
M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct
straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
Q. Flexible Air Duct:
1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold,Thermoflex, Cleveflex,or equal,and shall be
equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct.
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed
into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density
* fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an
inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the
latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181.
on Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive
pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for
velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E.
op R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan,
30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4"
� long securely held to retaining clamps.
S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum.
2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any
variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested
shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the
Drawing(minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room
shall be at 3/8 in.= 1 ft.0 in.scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has
s been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the
responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of
inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in
sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings.
2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES,AND REGISTERS
A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman,
equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's,
locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face
bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated.
Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by
the Engineer.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-11
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual
damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct
mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid
construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full
w
swing of the access door,two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated
ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate
doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by
12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for ■.
access to fire damper fusible links or other devices.
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened
to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be
hung with black 1"x 1/16"strap iron bent 1"under bottom side of the duct and fastened to
the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many
more so that they are not greater than 6"centers.
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that
the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point.
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the w�
Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area
shown on the Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be
based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum
leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in
ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer,or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and WX
adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or
grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for
the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of
the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped ..
with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with
damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8"plate held to duct with
sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall
not be used.
O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL
label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555
continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction
with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. ■
Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be
installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test
under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall
opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct
free area.
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-10
PM
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above
hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other
trades to avoid conflicts with structure,piping,conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming
quality.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or
SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed
ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance.
Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be
free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off.
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made
by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that
duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other
trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least
one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for
this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal
to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and
"Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co.
shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included.
F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats
2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over
to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18"may be used at the
HVAC Contractor's option.
G. Ducts from 18"to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the
same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall
have 1"standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42",the standing
bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners
not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be
jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at
not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6"
centers,sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure
seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more,
except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-
erection attachment of fittings.
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-9
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
additional cost to the Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate
protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon
completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises
all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains .R
on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller,required for the
installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor.
All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting
and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or
joists)is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer.Location for openings,etc.
shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work
with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-
ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls .�
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all
drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change .�
order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers,
volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve
numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition
to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-8
PM
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
ON Northampton,Massachusetts
each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps,fans,etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional
requirements.
1.16 PROTECTION
A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other
Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage
thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected,tested,
W and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material
and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of
work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or
foreign material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting,
setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each
Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling
and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the
equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure
to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor.
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather,
vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or
absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.
1.17 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all
foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all
piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of
cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being
placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-7
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College ..�
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts
for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
this period.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified
personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's
representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of
the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the
building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a
Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be
legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be
bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information: "•"
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of MW
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-6
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings
and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate
the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing
Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the
work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and
placement of all equipment and materials.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to
avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and
equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to
areas designated by the College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall,at all times,fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be
made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for
the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
wr
B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,
60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines
and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing, etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed
by the HVAC Contractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,
closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,unless specifically noted otherwise
on the Drawings.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-5
.m
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College no
Northampton,Massachusetts
1.7 SUBMITTALS .R
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the
project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the
College's HVAC Department for review and approval.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any
and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
HVAC Contractor. ••
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS �.
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water
or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable
work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract
requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably ..
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as
called for or reasonably implied in both.
..
Project No. 99037/50 15600 HVAC4
an
go
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
pa Northampton,Massachusetts
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items.
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury
at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by
suitable means.
me H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The I VAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
J. Before submitting his bid,the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings an
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work
since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in
regard thereto.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No
substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and
condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves,
Grundfos pumps,Tour and Anderson balancing valves,Tunstall steam traps.
�t
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. "Tests will be conducted in accordance
with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full
weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly
in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-3
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College •.�
Northampton,Massachusetts
12. Record Drawings.
13. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and ventilating
systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping and .w
equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such places
designated by the College.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and «.
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations,
the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS •+
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his
work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising
as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on
both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such *`
information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information
as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the ..
Project No.99037/50 15600 HVAC-2
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
w
SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of
Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
t under this, Section whether or not,such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
e Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated
on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following;
1. Unit heaters and radiators.
2. Pex tubing system and manifold.
3. Piping systems for hot water, supply and return, including pumps, heat exchanger
valves,and specialties.
on 4. Duct systems for and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and terminal
boxes.
M 5. Exhaust fans.
6. Insulation for piping,ductwork,and equipment.
po
7. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work
shall be by Yankee Technology,Inc.
8. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
9. Air and water balance,tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall be
preformed by"Wings Testing and Balancing,Inc and billed directly to the College."
10. Guarantee.
11. Instructions.
Project No.9903 7/5 0 15600 HVAC-1
N
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
00 Northampton,Massachusetts
C. After twenty-four(24) hours,test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present,
flush out system until all traces are removed.
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue
flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of
water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and un-disinfected
hose.
on E. Submit test results to Owner.
W
END OF SECTION
e Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-15
an
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts "'
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before so
masonry proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and
sealed.
3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS •.
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping
passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or
Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing
through same. Center pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls.
3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS ..
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the
Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be
tested prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed
and approved by the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by
the Plumbing Code.
3.8 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job,
thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers,
rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in
perfect condition and ready for use.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its .�
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid.
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill
lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride
as determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and
hydrants while system is being chlorinated.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-14
go
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill.
B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance
with the directions of the manufacturer.
C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At
minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of
dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each
joint as it is completed.
D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard
manufactured PVC adapters and fittings.
E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated
with unbroken continuity of invert.
3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to
weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel
with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service
lines may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as
may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and
fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit
not less than 1/2" between finished covering on the different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for
expansion and contraction of pipe.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the
Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at
such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the
General Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment,will be performed by the
General Contractor.
3.5 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged
in that business.
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 15400 Plumbing-13
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Drain and tail piece shall be just model J-ADA-35 offset tail piece with
removable basket.
2.9 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains,piping, etc.,not to be re-used shall be removed
by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing
Contractor shall
be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to
such places as designated by the Owner.
PART 3 -RXECT 1TION
3.1 SOIL, WASTE,DRAIN AND VENT PIPING aw
A. Installation:
fm
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste pipes shall
have a minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot
for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from as
two or more fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of
fixtures is noted.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil,waste, and drain lines shall be made with
reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of
450 wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a •
combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and
1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is
from horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the
inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. .�
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of ..
straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have
American National taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards
Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite
compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied to the male threads.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for
pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing ,..
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-12 �`
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
eR Northampton,Massachusetts
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to
establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with
the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall
be furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures
and equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the
wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished,
bright surfaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper
installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the
building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and
proper support of all plumbing fixtures.
C. Water Closet(P-1)Handicapped
1. Closet — American Standard "Madera" 17H Model 3043.102, elongated
vitreous china,siphon jet action with 1 '/2"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO-ADA with 1" angle stop, vacuum break-
er,wall and spud flanges.
3. Seat- Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy,open front
seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge.
D. Lavatory(P-2)Handicapped
1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings.
2. Supply Fitting - 5-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet, 4" center, self-
closing with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop
with flow, blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and
risers.
3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece
offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro
Handi Lav-Guard"molded vinyl insulation.
E. Single Bowl Sink(P-3)
1. Sink shall be "Just" Model SL-ADA-17519-A-6R 18 gauge stainless steel
with rear punched drain. Sink bowl shall be 19"X 17"X 4 '/2" deep.
2. Faucet shall be Delta model 2476 with spray and aqua-pure model AP-
D W S 1000 water filter.
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 15400 Plumbing-11
.A
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts *!►
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn
ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze
recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for
carpeted floors; or equal by J.R. Smith or Wade.
2.5 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-
sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1/2" thick for cold water.
Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0"of finished "R
floor shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints +*
taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to
form a vapor barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's ..
recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run
continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with ..
Truebro "Handi Lav-Guard", or equal,molded insulation kit.
2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS ...
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No
substitutions Will he allowed
2.7 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or
cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be
furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling
finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12 x 12
min.); in walls, shall be Karp type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall .�
ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x
12"min.)with screw driver type lock.
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division,
Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal.
2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Project No. 99037/50
15400 Plumbing-10 "'
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
E. Balancing Valves:
I. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter,with
calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential
pressure meter.
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson.
F. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings.
Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be
ASTM B62 cast bronze composition,swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309.
2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body
and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type
disc, Stockham Figure G-931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer,
or equal.
G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4".
H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440.
2.3 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee &
Mason, or equal.
B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve
foot(12')intervals for threaded piping.
C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6') intervals for
copper tubing 1-1/4" or less; ten foot (10) intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger.
Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be in-
stalled outside the insulation. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot(8')
intervals.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1') of each horizontal elbow.
Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5') in length shall be supported on hangers
placed not over 1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-9
am
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
"no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as
manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will h allow d All soil, waste, and
vent below slab shall be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas
and watertight. In lieu of lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service
weight with push-on rubber rings.
B. In lieu of cast iron piping,pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with
solder fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller
shall be type "M" copper.
D. All hot and cold water piping within the building shall be hard copper Type "L"
seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be lead
free,cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100",or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI
A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome
plated.
2.2 BALL VALVES an
A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series
B6001. No substitutions will be allowed- Valves shall be provided with stainless steel
ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-
off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe
insulation thickness.
B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with
attached cap and chain.
C. Provide gas cocks for sizes I" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas
piping 1-1/4" and larger with tee handles.
D. Gate Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class
125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi
wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends,with Teflon packing,two-piece packing ..�.
gland assembly,Hammond Figure 1R1138, Stockman, or equal.
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125.
Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc,
copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable
handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B-104,Hammond 1R1138,or equal. �.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or
equal.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-8
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words,
"Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the
building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall
have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions
shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals
shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up,operation,and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
' 7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well
as the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satislactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
this period.
40
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by
defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment
caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance
shall be considered as being defective.
1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700.
PART 2 -PROD TCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-7
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time ■*
to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural
supports (ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect.
Location for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due +■!
to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the
Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own
expense. ..
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new
walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes
where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing ••
Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by
the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. ..
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab
is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary,the Plumbing .�
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
1.15 WORK CONCEALED ON
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage 00
rooms,closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are
indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from
freezing.
1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures. This Subcontractor shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver
two(2)copies of the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. ..
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-6 "`
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings,traps, offsets,valves, and accessories as
may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials
and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Allliv delivery and storage must he
'co ordianted with the Smith College Physical Plant Department The Plumbing
Contractor shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment,
and shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these
materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall
be the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his
work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur
shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted
by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of is
Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the Plumbing Contractor.
1.13 PROTECTION
ww A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good
without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the
proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 15400 Plumbing-5
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop
Drawings,giving all details,dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance
with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review,
making any and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing
Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the
Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings
shall remain with the Plumbing Contractor. •.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with
the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of
the work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. *�!
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of ..
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Section 01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, .�
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any .�
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in w
the Plans and not in the Specifications,or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
Project No. 9903 7/5 0 15400 Plumbing-4 ..
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
� Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends,
offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for
the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
w patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
ON G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
w I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications
before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be
called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
No 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
on A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear
go in the product specification,and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in
0M accordance with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
O
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be
U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and
ow designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,
and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment.
Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-3
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in
conjunction with plumbing piping;not work of this Section. �*
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall
govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations,the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. ..
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also
exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious
laying out of his work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the **
Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if
the Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall
not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after .�
construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to ..�
the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting
from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of
dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing
Contractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such
liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose
decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in .,
question.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining
to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support,to all other trades requiring
such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames,
beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may
build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give
proper information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due
to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-2 �"`
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 15400 -PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts
of Division 1,as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work
me under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
on 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or
indicated on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to existing
drainage systems within the building. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, clean-
outs,fixtures,drains,supports, and roof terminals.
2. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the building or
on site.
3. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings,
insulation, supports,valves,water heater, and pump.
4. Plumbing fixtures and supports.
5. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
on
6. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water,
gas,drain,and waste connections.
7. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and
equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping,
fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush
valves, mixing valves, water heaters and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls) to
be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places
designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the
Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
Project No. 99037/50 15400 Plumbing-1
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible
with the couplings.
M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
.M
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having
jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of
water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control
valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the
system controlled by each valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow
including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install
valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test
valve for proper operation.
3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there
purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer
from NFPA's suggested styles.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls
and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over
the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-22
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire
walls,ceilings, floors, etc.
3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
so
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction,branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
vp C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
OM E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical
couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's
written instructions for rigid systems.
F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved
transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and lbundation walls. Refer to Division
15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods".
H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with
shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide
gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve
" arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal
and where they will not be subject to freezing.
J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 131.20.1,tapered pipe threads for field cut threads.
Join pipe,fittings, and valves as follows.
K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.
Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to
!' appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-21
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with
ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate
compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary
repair methods.
3.2 FIRE SAFING .�.
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the
work including,but not limited to the following: �+*
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations
through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers. **�
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway +�*
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and
machine rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, •�
Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the
required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as .A
manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation �.
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. „
Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
sealing compound.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-20
�s
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
F. Fire Protection Specialties
1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following
listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment
connections.
a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Corp., Model "M" standard
4-0 upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 1650F or as re-
quired by the insurance underwriter.
b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "M"
chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at 1650F
unless otherwise noted; to be installed in all occupied spaces.
c. Head guards shall be equal to Reliable Model 1 for upright sprinklers in
areas specified on drawings.
d. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Model "E" with
white finish,temperature 1650F unless noted otherwise
e. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Reliable Model H-1, 1" NPT,
165oF.
go PART 3 -EXECUTION
W
3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in
connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping instal-
lation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler
system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in
ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris
has not clogged sprinklers.
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at
W not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum
static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure
hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe
hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50
psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve
clappers open during test,to prevent damage.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-19
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than
quarter-turn. ■*
2. Gate Valves
a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body,
solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 459 an
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904
b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body
bronze mounted, solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1154 *�!
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
3. Check Valves
a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted,renewable
composition disc and bronze seat ring,bolted cover,flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940
Walworth: 8883-LT
4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,
including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping.
Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be
provided when necessary. „
5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in
no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless ...
unavoidable.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-18
a
FO
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Corner&Lada Co.,Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee&Mason Mfg. Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp.
5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper
piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length
indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support
is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly
from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of
parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying
with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by
trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate
supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to
support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems
and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not
exceeded.
10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on
attachments.
E. Valves
1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated;
provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube,
and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection
is Installer's option.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream
"w
pipe size.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-17
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than
4"
b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less.
C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.
2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58,
of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal
piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one
manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to
suit hanger rods.
a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. `
C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58,of
one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate
conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one
of the following:
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson,Inc.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-16 „�,
fm
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as
reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free
movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but
not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve
equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves
1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to
drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of con-
crete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to
prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with
oakum,caulk with lead,on both sides.
2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely
fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is
W insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe
sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome
finish for occupied areas;prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel
escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of
one of the following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty&Mfg.Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,
so partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on
exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers
penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.
qW D. Supports,Anchors, and Seals
1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS
SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping
service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-15
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and
permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied
spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall ""
construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti-
tions, except as indicated.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator
Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures
unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical
spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by
the Architect prior to installation.
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
compounder pipe joint tape(Teflon)where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer,
on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
.w
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making
grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. **�
I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and
prepare for application of specified coatings(if any).
J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural
section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to �.
isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section
with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove
burrs. .
b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation
walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and
pipe.
c. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through
walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-14
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
PP
Standard Steel: Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
(10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide grooved piping products of the following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of
NFPA 13 and shall be as follows:
1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas),
shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working
water pressure.
2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical
Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protec-
tion Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or
standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings.
3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black
steel pipe with screwed fittings.
4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175
psi.working water pressure.
5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings,
where noted on the drawings.
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and
couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated)by
use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections,within 1/16" misalign-
ment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched
to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel
with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-13
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
groove or mechanical locking type.
d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger)
(1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A
47.
(2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
(3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type,
which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an
elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast
in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts top
and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as speci-
fied in manufacturer's latest published literature.
(4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure
responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's
tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as
designated by ASTM D 2000.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183,
minimum tensile 110,000-psi.
(6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for •�
rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing
elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around
hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together
during assembly with nuts and bolts.
(7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved ..�
mechanical couplings.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel
bolt hole alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(9) Grooves: Conform to the following:
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-12
o Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
"flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish
extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with
screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames
of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet
glass.
r e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated
or, if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect.
f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the
valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all
valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed
under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where
directed. Furnish two(2)extra copies of the chart to the Architect.
g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white
lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve.
Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed
valves,approximately 12"below finished ceiling.
2.2 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
W 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A
53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required.
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI
B16.1.
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove
type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only.
(1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe:ASTM A 135.
(2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall
thickness for 6".
` (3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings;
roll-
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-11
OW
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Basic Identification
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification
materials of one of the following:
Allen Systems,Inc.
Brady(W. H.)Co., ; Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded
pipe markers,complying with ANSI A13.1.
a. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers,
extending 3600 around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which
best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect.
C. Locate pipe markers as follows:
(1) Near each valve and control device.
(2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each
piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of
piping and equipment.
(3) Branch piping need not be marked.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel
lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters
and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for
fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices.
a. Provide 1-1/8" sq.brass tags with black lettering.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded
type),or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment
of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
.�r
C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced
on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system,
system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or ...
space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which
are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses,by special
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-10
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than
1/4" = 1'-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the
work of other trades.
! ► 3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible
problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation
of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own ex-
!! pense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed
should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical
equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes
installed by other trades.
4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment
+* in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes,
etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision
before the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed.
5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required
to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of
conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor
must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this
Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may
be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be
done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not
interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions
or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings
showing foundations, floor plans,roof plans, and details.
7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the
architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the
Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this
Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,pressure
ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide
proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections;provide fittings of
materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where
more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-9
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart. ,m
7. List of recommended spare parts.
.m
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. AW
10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well
as the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work
in all parts for a period of one (1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree
to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective
during this period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused
by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment
caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance ..
shall be considered as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by
change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of
concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes
must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the
change.
C. Co-ordination of Trades
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the
Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to
permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible
interference or delay.
2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-8
MR
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
on Northampton,Massachusetts
NO A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and
obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to
drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs,
sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new
acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and
below the ceiling.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures.
No B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words,
"Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the
building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall
have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions
shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals
shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up,operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
�r
4. Lubrication chart.
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-7
on
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College 4W
Northampton,Massachusetts
also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects. M,
1.9 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for
his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and
charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all
responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate
to his part of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspec*p-1Xtions of .�
his work.
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Division 1.
1.1 l PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior
details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents
are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and
any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the
Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as
called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings. ow
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall
arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and
accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
..R
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-6
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the
attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.7 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be
U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and
designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,
and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment.
Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets,
giving all details,dimensions,capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and
fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations,
! ' elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections.
Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment.
" 1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's
insurer's rating organization (HU Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire
Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval.
wit
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for
compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the
Architect for review,making any and all changes,which may be required.
3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire
Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility
for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor.
eu
4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for
which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not
in accordance with the Specifications,the Fire Protection Subcontrac for will
be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his
own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1
5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which
indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-5
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the .r
Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage
done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work
resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in
case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire
Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection
Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by
the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract
for the work in question. .�
D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other
trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall Tarnish all information
pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other
trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also fiunish
all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the
General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire
Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to
bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends,
offsets, etc.
F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or
deck.
G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be
installed concealed in finished spaces.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his
work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such
loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work
shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall
be protected by suitable means. *'
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials
installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-4
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations
' pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to
commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating
organization and local Fire Department.
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear
! " in the product specification.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests
secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be
conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
*�* 1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall
ws govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,rules or regulations,
the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement
Officials'instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with
said officials prior to commencing work.
1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced
workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He
shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and
expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to
the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly
as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-3
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College ..�
Northampton,Massachusetts
micro-processors, or chips shall be "Year 2000 compliant" i.e., the changing of the ■
calendar time from 1999-2000 shall not result in any malfunction or degradation of the
system's or equipment's function. Manufacture's written certification of compliance
shall be included with the system or equipment shop drawing submittal. go
1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this a
information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes
in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted
as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based
on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before
beginning fabrication and installation.
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is
provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and
shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co- ,,,
ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be
based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter (I.R.I.). „
Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire
Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per
NFPA 13 and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance
Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-
ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork,
HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head
locations shall be subject to Architect's approval.
The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic cal-
culations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed
and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI)
Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with
NFPA 13 recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping
systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in '
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years.
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System".
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide".
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-2
Renovations to Hopkins House
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 15300 -FIRE PROTECTION
va
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of
Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
'""' Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably
!" incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein
and/or indicated on the drawings,including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Renovations to the existing dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be
installed in all spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing
building sprinkler system.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for
his own hoisting,rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project.
3. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete by or
interfering with new construction.
4. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter(IRI Insurance
company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO Box 5010,
�w Hartford Ct. (Attn: Mr. David M.Goush)for review and approval.
B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include
the following:
1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back
to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and
as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
go 2. Cutting and patching.
C. All systems and equipment furnished under this section which employ computers,
Project No. 99037/50 15300 Fire Protection-1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
1. Enclose wiring within housings of units or building construction. Do not use conduit
tiw exposed to view in finished spaces.
B. Alignment: Coordinate runway gates with platform travel and positioning, for accurate
alignment and minimum clearance between platforms, runway gates, sills, and gate frames.
C. Position sills accurately, raised slightly above adjoining floor surfaces to minimize intrusion of dirt
and spillage into runway. Fill space under sills solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
D. Adjust stops for accurate leveling at each landing,within specified tolerances.
1. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm) up or down, regardless of load and direction of
travel.
E. Lubricate operating parts of lift, including drive mechanism,guide rails, gates, safety devices, and
hardware.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each lift installation, and before permitting
the use of lifts, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by the "Code" and by
authorities having jurisdiction.
po
B. In addition to above testing, test operate lift continuously between lowest and highest landings
served, lifting full-rated capacity load for a minimum period of 30 minutes. Readjust stops and
other devices and signal equipment for accurate landings and operation of system.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in the proper use, operation, and maintenance of lifts.
Review emergency provisions, including access and procedures to be followed in checking for
! ' sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a
complete maintenance program.
B. Check each lift operation with Owners maintenance personnel present before time of Substantial
Completion. Determine that control system, operating components, and safety devices are
functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 14420
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA ■.e
I. System Control Voltage: 24 VAC.
D. Manual Lowering: Provide means to manually lower units in case of malfunction or power loss.
E. Concealed Wiring: Enclose wiring within housings of units. Do not use conduit exposed to
view.
.0
F. Self-Supporting Units: Support vertical loads of units only at base, with lateral support only at
landing levels.
G. Runway Enclosure: Rectangular steel-tube frame with flush steel-sheet panels.
1. Gates: Rectangular steel-tube frames with flush steel-sheet panels. 00
H. Platform: 0.123-inch-(3.1-mm-)thick,galvanized steel sheet.
1. Size: 36 inches by 54 inches minimum. 40
I. Platform Sides: Rectangular steel-tube frames with flush steel-sheet panels.
J. Provide unit for pit installation without the need for ramps or inclines. ow
2.4 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Steel and Iron Finishes: Prepare and finish iron and steel, including galvanized steel, as follows:
1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3,"Power Tool Cleaning,"
or SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning," followed by a conversion coating of type
suited to organic coating applied over it.
2. Prepare galvanized steel surfaces by removing dirt,grease, and other contaminants followed
by a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas; and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply
with ASTM A 780.
3. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard, polyester, powder coating complying with AAMA 605.2.
PART 3-EXECUTION
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS}
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
B. Steel Tubing: Either cold-or hot-formed steel tubing.
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; standard weight(Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated or required by
structural loads.
D. Carbon-Steel Sheet: Either cold-or hot-rolled, commercial-quality carbon steel.
1. Cold Rolled: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M).
2. Hot Rolled: ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
E. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of alloy and temper
designated below for each aluminum form required.
40 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T6.
2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M), 5005-H15.
OW F. Glass: Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section"Glazing."
G. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for
installing structural members, guide rails, machines, and other lift components where installation
of devices is specified in another Specification Section.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor-bolt-and-sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times the load imposed as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
I. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.3 VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
A. Systems and Machinery: Provide manufacturer's standard preengineered lift systems as indicated
in published product literature and as follows:
1. Rated Capacity: 750 lb.
2. Rated Speed: 9 fpm.
B. Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase.
C. Control System: Provide key-operated control complying with ASME A 17.1.
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-3
.o
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA an
similar information. Submit for Owner's information at Project Closeout as specified in
Division 1 Sections.
E. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates: Include operating permits as required by governing d w
authorities for normal, unrestricted use of lifts.
.■
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the lift manufacturer or an installer approved by the lift
manufacturer who has completed lift installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Part XX of
ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators," hereafter, the "Code."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty: Provide warranty executed by lift manufacturer for drive components, parts
and assemblies for a period of three (3)years.
so
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by am
skilled employees of the lift Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for
proper lift operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the so
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2-PRODUCTS m`
2.1 MANUFACTURERS no
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: am
1. Vertical Wheelchair Lifts:
a. Access Industries, Inc.
b. Concord Elevator, Inc.
C. Garaventa Ltd..
d. National Wheel-O-Vator Co, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 14420-WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vertical wheelchair lifts.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring
devices in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in
masonry.
3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to lifts, including fused disconnect switches.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lift: Complete lift assembly including drive system, guide rails, buffers(if any), platform, runway
enclosures and gates, access panels, signals, control system, electrical wiring, and devices necessary
to provide specified or"Cade"-required performance, operations, safety, and security.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lift indicated. Include rated capacities, dimensions,
performances, operations, safety features, controls, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each lift. Show plans, elevations, and details. Show interfaces with other
work, including loading on structure, together with indication of required clearances.
C. Samples: Of exposed finishes for platforms, gates, runways, and control devices; 3 inches (75
mm) square for sheet materials; and 4 inches (100 mm)long for running-trim members.
D. Maintenance Manuals: For each different lift. Include operating and maintenance instructions,
parts list with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory list, emergency instructions, and
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-1
lAUr
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerances of 1/8 inch in 8 feet(3 mm in 2.4
M).
C. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24
inches (600 mm) o.c.
D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate
smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 12356
00
0.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.3 CABINET MATERIALS
A. Exposed Materials:
I. Exposed Wood Species: Cherry. Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that are
noticeably dissimilar in color,grain, figure, or natural character markings.
2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects, selected for
compatible grain and color, and kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with face veneer of species
indicated, selected for compatible color and grain with Grade A faces.
B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects and kiln
dried to 7 percent moisture content. Stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces.
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood complying with HPVA HP-1 with Grade C faces stained to
be compatible with exposed surfaces.
3. Vinyl-Faced Particleboard: Medium-density particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1,
Grade M-2 with an embossed, wood-grain-patterned vinyl film adhesively bonded to
particleboard.
C. Concealed Materials: 4W
1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting
strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent No
moisture content, respectively.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
4. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
2.4 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. General: Complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, material, size, and finish as selected from
manufacturer's standard choices. ■'
B. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound
when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with
BHMA A156.9,Type B05091.
so
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION Am
A. Install casework without variations in plane of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where
casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe
strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356-2
OR Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
�w Northampton, MA
SECTION 12356-KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes kitchen cabinets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cabinets and cabinet hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans and elevations. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, and
hardware.
1. Cabinets: Verify dimensions of installation areas by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Show fillers and scribes if necessary.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards:
1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1.
a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal
:# affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the
above standard.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Omega Cabinets, Ltd; Dynasty series
2.2 COLORS,TEXTURES,AND PATTERNS
A. Colors,Textures, and Patterns: Sheffield Style; Cherry with honey stain.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Built-in Appliances: Securely anchor to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
B. Freestanding Appliances: Place in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area.
Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
END OF SECTION 11451
wr
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ,W
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace appliance that fails in materials and workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. General Electric Company.
2. Fisher-Paykel
2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
A. Electric Range: With four-burner cooktop and oven with broiler, UL listed.
1. Width: 30 inches(762 mm).
2. Type: GE-JB940AY.
3. Color: Almond.
B. Microwave Oven: UL listed.
.�►
1. Type: GE-JVM 1460AA undercabinet microwave with ducted exhaust.
2. Capacity: 1.4 cu. ft. (0.042 cu. m).
3. Wattage: 1480
4. Color: Almond.
C. Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding, two-door refrigerator with freezer, UL listed. Ak
1. Type:GE-TFX20JAB Side by side.
2. Defrosting: Frost free.
3. Color: Almond. .w
D. Dishwasher: Built-in, undercounter, automatic dishwasher, sized to replace 24-inch- (610-mm-)
base cabinet, with hot-air and heat-off drying cycles, sliding dish racks with removable silverware •+
basket, UL listed.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Fisher-Paykel; DD602 I ow
2. Number of Wash Cycles: 8.
3. Drawer and Door Liner: Polypropylene.
4. Color: Front panel by kitchen cabinet supplier to match cabinet faces am
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
r.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -2
to Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ranges.
2. Microwave ovens.
3. Refrigerator/freezers.
4. Dishwashers.
B. See Division 16 Sections for electrical services and connections to residential appliances.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential
appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
C. ARAM Standards:
1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to
ANSI/AHAM HRF-1.
D. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade
Commission.
1.4 DELIVERY
A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in spaces to receive
appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10801
go
�w
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3
MW
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA .K
A. Paper Towel Dispenser:
I. Product: Supplied by Owner
2. Surface.
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: B-76867
2. Type: Double-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. !
4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle
C. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Product: Supplied by Owner
2. Mounting: Surface. ewr
D. Grab Bar:
1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm)thick. ..�
2. Mounting: Concealed.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for medium-duty applications.
E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal:
1. Type: Rubbermaid.
2. Mounting: Surface.
3. Construction: Seamless exposed walls, self-closing top and removable/reusable receptacle.
F. Robe Hook:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: HB Ives; No 582; MB26D finish.
2. Double-Prong Unit: Stainless-steel, double-prong robe hook with rectangular wall bracket
and backplate for concealed mounting. .�
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
no
A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights
indicated. al
1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N), when tested
according to method in ASTM F 446. MW
M.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2
..
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19,ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), or ASTM B 30 castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, 0.0359-inch(0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60(Z180).
+ ► E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1
ps Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
END OF SECTION 10100
4
w
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-3
so
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA MR
G. Laminating Adhesive: Moisture-resistant, thermoplastic-type adhesive.
H. Panel Sizes: Supply panels for incorporation into wood trim frames in sizes indicated by
architectural woodwork fabricator.
2.2 TACKBOARDS Am
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: so
1. Forbo Industries
B. Natural Linoleum Tackboards: Seamless sheet, 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, ground natural cork so
compressed with a resinous binder with integral color throughout, laminated to burlap backing.
C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch-(1.57-mm-)thick, extruded-aluminum alloy.
Provide straight, single-length units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline
closure. ..�
1. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to
normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated.
B. Factory-assembled chalkboard and tackboard units, unless field-assembled units are required.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board.
2. Provide vertical joint system between abutting sections of chalkboards.
3. Provide mullion trim at joints between chalkboards and tackboards.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate units in with perimeter wood trim and backing sheet(if necessary).
B. Coordinate with door assemblies when part of casework.join parts with a neat, precise fit.
3.2 INSTALLATION "
A. Install units with fabricated casework.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 10100-VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Whiteboards.
2. Tackboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board and accessory indicated.
B. Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3 WARRANTY
PART 2-PRODUCTS
OPP
2.1 MARKERBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
2. Greensteel, Inc.
B. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024-inch(0.61-mm).
C. Face Sheet Material: Enameling grade steel. Coat exposed face and edges with three-coat process
consisting of primer, ground coat, and color cover coat. Coat concealed face with two-coat
process consisting of primer and ground coat. Fuse cover and ground coats to steel at
manufacturer's standard firing temperatures, but not less than 1200 deg F (649 deg Q.
D. Face Sheet Cover Coat: Light-colored, special writing surface with gloss finish intended for use
with erasable dry markers.
E. Core: 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick, particleboard core material complying with requirements in
ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1.
F. Backing Sheet: 0.005-inch-(0.127-mm-)thick, aluminum-foil sheet.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100- 1
MW
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA * !
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. aw
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
B. Wood Trim: ..
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. .
b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-lustre acrylic enamel.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster:
1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
B. Wood and Hardboard:
1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
C. Ferrous Metal:
ww
1. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
END OF SECTION 09912
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-6
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
for
prepared painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint,apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
twi recommended by manufacturer.
K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer,
to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient
sealing.
M. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.
B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
* 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Smooth Wood:
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-5
so
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA „.
2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. ,.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes
and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth
when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,
faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and
paneling.
C. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on back side.
d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat "W
before priming.
b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.
E. Material Preparation: w.G
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using. .�
F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector
covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in
these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles. on
3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. ..
5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match
exterior.
PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912,4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
� Northampton, MA
2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall&
Trim Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series.
B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim
Enamel.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series.
C. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 271.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1516-XXXX Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-1110 Series SpeedHide Interior Enamel Wall&Trim Semi-Gloss Oil.
4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 for inspection and acceptance of surfaces to be
painted.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
a written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
5. Pratt and Lambert, Inc. (P& Q.
..s
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
C. Colors: Match samples.
2.3 PREPARATORY COATS
A. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
I. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
B. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and
recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated.
1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying,rust-inhibitive metal primer.
2. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate
indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.
2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2200-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Flat Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex.
4. Sherwin-Williams;A-100 Exterior Latex Flat House &Trim Paint A6 Series.
B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint:
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185.
2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin
Finish.
3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House&Trim Satin-Acrylic Latex.
4. Sherwin-Williams;A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House&Trim Paint A82 Series.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912,2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
SECTION 09912-PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F(7 and 35 deg Q.
D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
Yp
temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).
3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
PAINTING(PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 09912- 1
W
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA *�
A. Carpet Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet
that does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet from unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10
percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
B. Carpet Cushion Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form agreeing to replace carpet cushion that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion from unusual
traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to,
permanent indentation or compression.
win
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. As indicated in schedule
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI 104,for direct glue-down application.
B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in
closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. •
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680-2
FM
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09680-CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
w A. This Section includes carpet and intregral carpet cushion.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each for each carpet, cushion, and exposed accessory and for each color and pattern
required.
C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
D. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
010 A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
CARPET 09680- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
I. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
J. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09652
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not:use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48
hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
t" dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
pa 4. Avoid cross seams.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,
and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to
produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
H. Integral Flash Cove Base: Cove floor coverings up vertical surfaces as indicated. Support floor
coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove strip. Butt at top under wood cap strip.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA '
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following: ,
1. Forbo Industries, Inc.; Marmoleum.
B. Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. .N
C. Sheet Width: 6.6 feet(2.0 m).
D. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS *�+
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering ,.
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range to contrast with floor covering.
D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 1-inch(25-mm)radius provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed �.
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3. Moisture Testing:
a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after •a
substrates pass testing.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
SECTION 09652-SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-bT9-inch (150-by-
230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm)long, of each color required.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are
competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by
floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
PW
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
to time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
ON 2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
0M B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09652- 1
pe
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
eA Northampton, MA
D. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks,voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of
adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
E. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
PM F. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09651
RM
MM
MR
IM
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ..
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or ..,
blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that ARI
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to
be installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
AA
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles A�
at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that
equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
so
1. Lay tiles square with room surfaces.
B. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
�I
C. Install nosings, treads and risers where indicated.
AIR
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -2
..R
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rubber floor tile.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following
time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
D. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER FLOOR TILE
A. Rubber Floor Tile: ASTM F 1344.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
B. Color and Pattern: As indicated.
C. Accessories: Stair tread and risers, stair nosings.
PP
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners
and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise
fit.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3
MW
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension
systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for
exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Products:
w.
1. Armstrong World Industries; "Cirrus" angled tegular, 24x24x3/4" panels.
B. Color: White.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Products:
.IP
1. Armstrong World Industries; 15/16" Prelude Plus; Aluminum grid.
B. Steel Suspension System:
1. Cap Finish: White
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers,use trapezes or equivalent devices.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with
concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 *■
inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in
12 feet(3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, and for each
color and texture required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-
accredited laboratory.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
!" D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, 'Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.106-inch-(2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods
indicated in ceramic the installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with
TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to
electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting. Provide uniform
joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
4"
3.3 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior wall installation over gypsum board on metal studs; organic adhesive; TCA W242.
1. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE 09310-3
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA no
1. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 2 inch (51 by 51 mm).
ON
2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bonsal,W. R., Company. ow
2. LATICRETE International Inc.
3. MAPEI Corporation.
4. Southern Grouts& Mortars, Inc.
5. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
6. TEC Specialty Products Inc.
�w
B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1,Type I.
C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7, color as indicated.
1. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that "W
comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920;Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT,
G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
ow
PART 3,EXECUTION
as
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap,wax, oil, to
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to aw
tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions,bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 1W
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site
before installing.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
CERAMIC TILE 09310-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE-
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Glazed ceramic mosaic wall tile.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples:
Pm 1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. As scheduled
B. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
C. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile[CT-<#>]: Factory-mounted flat tile as follows:
1. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm).
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch(6.35 mm).
3. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
1W D. Ceramic Mosaic Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with
sizes and coursing where applicable.
CERAMIC TILE 09310- 1
No Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
face paper according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by
Architect.
B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit:gypsum veneer plaster in the following areas where veneer plaster will
be concealed from view in the completed Work, unless otherwise indicated or required to
maintain fire-resistance rating. Do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture,
RIP furnishings, and similar removable items.
1. Above suspended ceilings.
2. Behind wood paneling and other permanently applied wall or ceiling finishes.
C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 09215
GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER 09215-5
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844, unless manufacturer's written „w
recommendations are more stringent.
1. Do not allow gypsum base to fade from exposure to light.
2. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
3. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
4. On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall/partition panels to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
5. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum base panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing),
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels. +
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
6. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
B. Cementitious Backer Units: Install according to ANSI A108.11. w.
3.3 TRIM ACCESSORY AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION ..
A. Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written no
instructions.
B. Joint Reinforcement:
so
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape
and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations. ..
2. Cementitious Backer Units: Reinforce joints between cementitious backer units with joint
tape and embedding material according to unit manufacturer's written recommendations.
aw
3.4 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials. `
2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts metal door frames,windows, and other units in veneer
plaster,groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.
3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from exposure to light. A
Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to faded
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Resilient Channels: 25ga. Galvanized steel 1/z"x2 1/z" designed for isolation of structural borne
sound transmission.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corp.;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
D. Bonding Compound for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 631.
E. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033
to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing),
w produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber-type requirements of
assembly.
PART 3,EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Monolithic Concrete Substrates:
1. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles,grease, oil, incompatible curing compounds,
form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with
bonding compound and plaster.
2. Remove ridges and protrusions greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) and fill all depressions
greater than 1/4 inch(6 mm)with portland cement mortar. Allow to set and dry.
3. Apply bonding compound on dry and fully cured concrete substrates.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA �..
A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587 and formulated for application directly
over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material.
1. Available Products: "
a. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Cameo Veneer Plaster.
b. National Gypsum Company;X-KALibur Plaster.
C. United States Gypsum Co.; DIAMOND Interior Finish Plaster.
.wb
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588, products of same manufacturer as plaster, and in
thickness indicated.
1. Type X.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, in thickness indicated. s.
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES am
A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047.
go
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. L-Bead: Use at panel edges that meet dissimilar materials.
.m
2.5 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer ..►
plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape: aft
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: In material recommended by gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer for applications indicated.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer.
C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape:
I. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Material produced and recommended by gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material and gypsum veneer plaster
applications indicated.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: Material recommended by cementitious backer unit
manufacturer for applications indicated.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215-2
PP Renovations to Hopkins Basement
m Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 09215 -GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gypsum veneer plaster over monolithic concrete, gypsum veneer plaster over gypsum base
and gypsum base for veneer plaster.
2. Cementitious backer units for tile backing panels.
'k 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Gypsum Veneer Plaster Products: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products,
including gypsum base, joint reinforcing tape, embedding material, and plasters, from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum veneer plaster assembles with fire-resistance
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2,PRODUCTS
40
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09215- 1
4w
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
END OF SECTION 08814 Northampton, MA oft
wo
OR
so
on
MIRRORED GLASS 08814-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A hardness.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer
for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrored glass by
spot application.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic
with existing finishes or primers.
B. Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer
and with referenced GABA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass accurately in place
in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
C. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting
surface.
D. Mastic Spot Installation System:
00
1. Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of
mirrored glass and backing material.
2. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of
mounting surface.
3. After mastic is applied, align mirrored glass units and press into place while maintaining a
minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrored glass and mounting
surface.
E. For wall-mounted mirrored glass units, install permanent means of support at bottom and top
edges with bottom support designed to withstand mirrored glass weight and top support designed
to prevent mirrored glass from coming away from wall along top edges.
1. For continuous bottom supports, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch(2 mm)thick by 4 inches
(100 mm) long at quarter points. For channels or other continuous supports in which
water could be trapped, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than
1/4 inch(3 mm)wide by 3/8 inch(4.5 mm)long.
F. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
1. Do not permit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water.
2. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being
exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
MIRRORED GLASS 08814-3
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
PART 2-PRODUCTS Northampton, MA an
2.1 MANUFACTURERS am
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection: AW
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified. am
2.2 FLOAT GLASS go
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat).
1. Clear: Class 1 (clear), Quality q2 (mirror). am
a. Thickness: 6 mm.
2.3 MIRRORED GLASS
A. Silvered Mirrored Glass:
1. Manufacturers: „p
a. American Mirror Company, Inc.
b. Carolina Mirror Company. ,
C. Gardner Glass Products.
d. Lenoir Mirror Company.
e. Sunshine Mirror.
f. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc. 40
g. VVP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products.
h. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
2. Shivering: Successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically �.
deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating applied to
second glass surface to produce coating system complying with FS DD-M-411.
B. Fabrication:
1. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrored glass without marring visible
surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrored glass.
2. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
a. Silvered Mirror Glass: Seal edges after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
es
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
W&
MIRRORED GLASS 08814-2
ow
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08814-MIRRORED GLASS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Silvered mirrored glass.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
! " A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior
Glaziers)or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GABA's "Glazing Manual,"
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's
"Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of
Mirrors."
1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. For silvered mirrored glass, comply with mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions for
shipping, storing, and handling mirrored glass as needed to prevent deterioration of shivering,
damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected
from moisture including condensation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrored glass units that deteriorate f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site,within 5 years
from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Deterioration of Silvered Mirrored Glass: Defects developed from normal use not caused
by maintaining and cleaning mirrored glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include discoloration,black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
MIRRORED GLASS 08814- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA r�
Door C
I ML2230 lockset
1 '/z Pair FBB 191 Butts
I Ives 447/448 Stop
I Robe hook(see bath accessories)
I 10"kickplate
I closer
1 set weatherstripping 45041 (white)
.M/
Door D
1 track Hager 9101 x 192"
4 9105 four wheel hangers
2 9112 Stops
1 9115 Bottom guide aw
1 9884 Edge pull
M"
2 2 8 1 D Flush Bolts
Active leaf
me
2 17N Flush Pulls
I % pair 179FBB butts MP
1 1445 Roller catch
1W
1 1/8 x 1"brass astragal
ON
END OF SECTION 08711
MM
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -6
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled
fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting
performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of
wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and
frames for surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107.
C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series.
D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
1. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements.
1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 deg rees, the door
will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 nun) from the latch,
measured to the leading edge of the door.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to
perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Door A
Reuse existing
Door B
Reuse existing
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -5
OR
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
1. Manufacturers:
a. Gasketing:
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
2) National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
3) Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM). ••
4) Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
5) Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
2. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, based on testing
according to ASTM E 1408.
3. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
2.11 SLIDING AND FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. Sliding Door Hardware: Complete sets consisting of rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor ..r
guides, and accessories indicated.
1. Manufacturers: an
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. Johnson, L. E. Products, Inc. (LEJ).
so
2.12 CYLINDERS, KEYING,AND STRIKES
A. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved so
lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.
wm
2.13 FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door •�
hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard
materials if different from specified standard.
B. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, ..
unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for
fire-rated applications.
C. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
ow
D. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.6 OPERATING TRIM
A. Push-Pull Design: As scheduled.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
2.7 CLOSERS
A. Surface-Mounted Closers:
1. Manufacturers:
M a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).
B. Size of Units: Factory-sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening
force.
2.8 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Protective Trim Units: Sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2
inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with
exposed machine or self-tapping screws.
1. Material: Metal.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hager Companies (HAG).
W, 2) Ives, H. B. (NS).
3) Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Stops and Holders: Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled
or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall
stops are not appropriate,provide overhead holders.
o 1. Manufacturers:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation(BH).
b. Hager Companies (HAG).
C. Ives, H. B. (NS).
B. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.10 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
+ A. Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide
smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide
noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -3
•s
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
PART 2 -PRODUCTS Northampton, MA an
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 'm
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for each door
hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets. 04
2.2 DOOR HARDWARE
no
A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to schedule.
OR
2.3 PIVOTS AND HINGES
A. Manufacturers: .e
1. Hinges:
a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). an
B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames,provide only template-produced units. am
C. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following:
1. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin.
aw
D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads fmished to match surface of hinges.
1. Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes).
2. Wood Doors and Frames: Wood screws.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES 00
A. Manufacturers:
1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR). OR
B. Mortise Lockset Design: As scheduled.
No
C. Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements.
D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches(70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. no
2.5 BOLTS
no
A. Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated, designed for mortising into door
edge.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Commercial door hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
on A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of electrified door hardware and wiring diagrams.
C. Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function,
size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item.
Include description of each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation.
D. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
E. Product certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: Person who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural Hardware
Consultant.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical
modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
are acceptable.
C. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be
factory prepared for installing door hardware.
D. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in BHMA directory of certified
products.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
C. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements
specified in 'Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWVv'DA 101/I.S.2.
D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and
masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other
contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings
and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
F. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and
clean surfaces.
G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
END OF SECTION 08550
40
to
WOOD WINDOWS 08550-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the .r.
following:
1. Eagle Window& Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, High-Performance Organic Finish:
Two-coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.
1. Color:White.
2.3 GLAZING
A. Glass: Clear float glass, Obscure float glass, or Clear insulating-glass units as indicated.
B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wood windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with
AAMA/NWVIIDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a
complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied.
2.5 WOOD FINISHES
A. Factory-Primed Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat on interior wood MW
surfaces and interior fixed sash units.
PART 3-EXECUTION on
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall
flashing and other adjacent construction.
WOOD WINDOWS 08550-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08550-WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following primed and aluminum-clad wood-framed window product
types:
1. Casement windows.
2. Fixed windows.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated,
based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of
minimum test size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other
Work, and operational clearances.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for
Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of
performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and
GANA's "Glazing Manual"unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty Period for Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
WOOD WINDOWS 08550- 1
AM
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Core: [Particleboard] [Glued block] [Structural composite lumber] [Either glued block
or structural composite lumber] [Either glued or nonglued block or structural composite
lumber].
2. Construction: [Five] [Five or seven] plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire
unit abrasive planed before veneering.
3. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. «
C. Interior Hardboard-Faced Solid-Core Doors:
1. Core: Either glued block or structural composite lumber.
2. Construction: Three plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before faces are applied.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors to comply with manufactures s written instructions, referenced quality standard, and
as indicated.
B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut
surfaces after fitting and machining.
END OF SECTION 08211
am
an
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2
go
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08211 ,FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-core doors as follows:
1. Doors with medium-density overlay faces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
! 2. Buell Door Company.
3. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division.
4. GRAHAM Manufacturing Corp.
5. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.
6. IPIK Door Company.
7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
8. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces for Interior Doors: Medium-density overlay.
B. Interior Veneer-Faced Solid-Core Doors:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in-place partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on
frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
xv
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-) for wood doors.
C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single-door frames and two silencers on double-door frames. ..
D. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch-(1.0-mm-) thick zinc-coated steel sheet.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc-coat items that are to be built
into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from defects including
warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117.
C. Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware
schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in
ANSI A250.6 and ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
D. Frame Construction: .M
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face
joints. Provide temporary spreader bars. w.
E. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
F. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying
with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3,EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches (2286
mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model,
material description, label compliance, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
MR
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
2. Benchmark Commercial Doors;a division of General Products Co., Inc.
3. Ceco Door Products;a United Dominion Company.
4. Pioneer Industries Inc.
5. Republic Builders Products.
6. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS),Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
2.3 FRAMES
A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness:
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1
4P
ON
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
40 Northampton, MA
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
H. Tin uncoated copper surfaces at edges of sheets to be soldered, for a width of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm), using solder recommended for copper work. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated,
do not tin edges, but wire brush lead coating before soldering.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure metal roofing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 07610
07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
indicated for conditions affecting performance of sheet metal roofing. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive ...
installation.
B. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal roofing. Strip with care
to avoid damage to finish.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing to comply with sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install felt underlayment and building's paper slip sheet on substrate under metal roofing, unless ..,
otherwise recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage,
where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roofing. Apply from eave to
ridge in shingle fashion and lap joints 2 inches (50 mm) minimum.
D. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats,valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings,
and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown ..
and as required for leakproof construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of the
Work. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Shop fabricate materials
to greatest extent possible.
E. Sealant-Type Joints: Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members
not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), at time of
installation, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints
at temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg C). Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section"Joint �..
Sealants" for handling and installing sealants.
F. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form
exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering
temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,
welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges,
unless otherwise indicated.
07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Metal Accessories: Provide components matching sheet metal roofing in finish and material that
are required for a complete roofing system, including the following:
PW
1. Clips, flashings, and ridge closure strips.
2. Trim, copings and gutters.
OR C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids
polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with
release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
D. Elastomeric joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints in roofing that will remain weathertight and as
recommended by the roofing manufacturer for installation indicated.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
mm) dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive
+ compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown, with metal roofing
manufacturer's written instructions, and with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
installation indicated.
B. Fabricate sheet metal to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage,
damage, and deterioration of the Work. Brake--form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates
without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, and
with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Machine formed panels are not acceptable.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, or would not be sufficiently waterproof and weatherproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant (concealed
within joints).
D. Sealant joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce
weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation
as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-3
..
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College an
Northampton, MA
A. Deliver metal coils, panels, and other roofing materials so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Package roofing materials for protection against transportation damage.
w
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roofing materials to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof coils and panels to ensure dryness. Do not store coils or
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, unless otherwise indicated. w.
1. Weight(Thickness): 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.7 mm),unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749,Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet,with a minimum thickness of
0.0625 inch (1.6 mm), but not less than 0.0937 inch (2.4 mm) thick for applications where w
burning(welding) is involved.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, Polymer-Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum ..
40 mils (1 mm)thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be ..
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: W.R. Grace& Co.
C. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard;Nord Bitumi US, Inc.
d. F210;Northern Elastomeric, Inc.
e. Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
f. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation.
B. Building Paper: Minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft. (2.4 kg/sq. m), rosin sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and accessory items as required for a complete roofing system and as .A
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator for metal roofing work, unless
otherwise indicated.
07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 07610-SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
Li RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
L Standing-seam metal roofing.
2. Flat seam soldered metal roofing
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and decking.
o
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Install sheet metal roofing capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, wind loading,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into the building interior.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed sheet metal roofing
similar in material, design, forming method, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Industry Standard: Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
4. For cellulosic loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers
Association's "Special Report#3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
5. Apply self-supported, spray-applied, cellulosic insulation according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits,
wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other
items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make it
even with studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
6. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a
density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m),.
D. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected
from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated.
Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled
with loose-fiber insulation.
am 1. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
2. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
3. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
"a work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION 07210
OW
on
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an
inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less
than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m),with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm(2.9 an
ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
■
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation .�
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces
and vented eaves.
ow
PART 3-EXECUTION
no
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions .�
applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to
envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with
insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
B. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in between Z clips.
C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method
indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated,
bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent ..
placement and support of units.
1. Seal joints between closed-cell(nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic,
or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill
voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant.
2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. •.e
a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
3. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements: a*
a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
07210-2
BUILDING INSULATION MR
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Cavity wall insulation.
2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Loose-fill building insulation.
4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
po
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m),
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively.
C. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: See Division 6, "Rough Carpentry.
D. Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock
►► wool:
I. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
NO spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
E. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied, Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type I (materials applied
with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated for
flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.
NO
2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS
BUILDING INSULATION
07210- 1
IM
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
PM Northampton, MA
3.4 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected horizontal membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction
END OF SECTION 07142
to
PM
PM
HOT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-3
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College ow
Northampton, MA
B. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer.
C. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: 50-mil-(1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene
PART 3-EXECUTION ..
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,
dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting
other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating
contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
3.2 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to CAN/CGSB-37.51,
"Application of Rubberized Asphalt, Hot-Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing," and
waterproofing manufacturers written instructions. ,.
3.3 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Apply rubberized asphalt according to CAN/CGSB-37.51 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil- or air-jacketed melter with mechanical agitator specifically
designed for heating rubberized-asphalt waterproofing.
C. Apply primer, at manufacturers recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow to dry.
D. Unreinforced Membrane: Apply waterproofing to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated.
Spread hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to provide a uniform, unreinforced, seamless
membrane 180 mils (4.5 mm)thick.
E. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to
heights indicated or required by manufacturer.
F. Install protection course with overlapped joints while rubberized asphalt is still hot.
HOT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
SECTION 07142-HOT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unreinforced, hot fluid-applied waterproofing membrane.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products; and who is eligible to receive waterproofing warranty specified.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below 0 deg F(minus 18 deg C).
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following:
1. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Monolithic Membrane 6125.
2. American Permaquik Inc.; Permaquik 6100.
3. Carlisle Corporation,Carlisle Coatings&Waterproofing Div.; CCW 500.
4. Miradri,T. C.; Miraseal 9100.
5. Tremco;Tremproof 150.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Membrane: Single-component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt
complying with CAN/CGS&37.50.
HOT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
END OF SECTION 06402
ow
No
OR
.R
Mw
,
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 10
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
F, Northampton, MA
fine finishing nails [or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces
less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8
inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
L Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
I. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime
coats were applied in shop.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
" restore damaged or soiled areas.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-9
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA �*
C. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this Section,
regardless of whether shop applied or applied after installation. The extent to which the final
finish is applied at fabrication shop is Contractor's option, except shop apply at least the prime ,.
coat before delivery.
D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling �.
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
overlay.
E. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, 1Ad
and sheen,with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1. AWI Finish System TR-4: Conversion varnish.
2. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
3. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
4. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb,true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb(including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged "`
finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402.8
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Solid colors.
b. Patterns.
E. Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on cabinet
surfaces except laminate edge in kitchen.
OR F. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch(13 mm).
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-
surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes.
E. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives,
sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
F. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
2.8 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent-finished
architectural woodwork located in same area of building,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Profile: Copper Beech Cornice profiles as indicated.
2.9 SHOP FINISHING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
only final touchup, cleaning,and polishing until after installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 7
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be
complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. *
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of
assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling .w
for shipment.
E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
2.5 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated.
D. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Plain Sawn Cherry.
E. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed
surfaces. **
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
F. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative so
laminate countertops.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures .ew
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturers full range of colors and finishes in the
following categories:
06402-6
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Aw
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
L. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1 1/4-inch (32-mm) OD, black, molded,
plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base;
BHMA 636 for steel base.
N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturers standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
P
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion
sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
u1►
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL_
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the
referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm)
Thick or Less: 1/16 inch(1.5 mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
!! mm).
3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm).
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
# shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div.
C. Laminart.
.w
d. Pioneer Plastics Corp.
e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
F. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Water based low VOC contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Adhesive specified above for faces. ..
G. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a
precoated finish.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Corian; DuPont Polymers.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets."
B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA
numbers or items referenced to this standard.
C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-(2.4-mm-) thick
metal, and as follows:
�s
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.
D. Frameless Concealed Hinges(European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening,
self-closing.
E. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
F. Wire Pulls: Back mounted,4 inches(100 mm)long,5/16 inches(8 mm) in diameter.
G. Catches: Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9, B03013.
H. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102;with shelf brackets, B04112.
1. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.
J. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:
1. File Drawer Slides: 1150 1b(670 NA [2001bf(890 NA.
K. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 ow
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
" work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
�w measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified,unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified,unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Cherry.
ow
D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
a. Submit evidence of low VOC content binders and glues and resins.
2. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative
laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, fittings and other
items installed in architectural woodwork.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated. '
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.
2. Plastic laminates.
3. Solid-surfacing materials.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance' Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified. ,.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as .�
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
.es
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions"Article.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
' 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Solid surfacing-material countertops.
4. Interior ornamental trim.
5. Shop finishing interior woodwork.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
ws strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors."
4. Division 10 Section "Visual Display Boards" for marker and tackboards incorporated into
the work specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated,including cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Product Data: For medium-density fiberboard, plywood, high-pressure decorative laminate,
adhesive for bonding plastic laminate,solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories,
am and finishing materials and processes.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails of stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel.
..a
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours. `
B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Comply with
requirements for surface preparation and application in Division 9 Section"Painting."
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work.
Refinish and seal cuts.
B. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length
pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim.
Cope at returns and miter at corners.
C. Siding: Install siding and flashing according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do
not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding, unless otherwise recommended by
siding manufacturer. Seal joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
D. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
END OF SECTION 06200 *
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY
PART I ,GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing and running trim.
2. Siding.
B. See Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork' for interior woodwork not specified in
this Section.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
A
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," for
lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber
Standards Committee Board of Review.
2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Exterior Standing and Running Trim: Finished lumber and moldings.
1. Species and Grade: Smooth-textured, Clear Cedar.
B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: Finished lumber and moldings.
1. Species and Grade or Cut: Poplar or any closed grain hardwood.
err
2.3 SIDING
A. Lumber Siding: Kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20, in size and pattern
indicated.
1. Species and Grade: T&G Fir board siding.
B. Plywood Siding: Exterior-type,APA 303 series siding, 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-)thick, medium-density
overlay.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill
holes with wood filler.
E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
11R
1. Comply with"Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
G. Fastening Methods:
1. Subflooring: Glue and nail to wood framing.
2. Sheathing: Nail or staple to wood framing.
40 3. Underlayment: Nail or staple to subflooring.
4. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
00 H. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and 6-inch (150-mm) end lap;
fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-
inch(102-mm) overlap.
END OF SECTION 06100
p
40
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. KC Metals Products, Inc.
C. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.
d. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
2. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in
effect for Project.
3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published
values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency. w
C. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
asphalt felt), unperforated. M„
D. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer;
1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. "'"`
E. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that
is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel ,o
manufacturers.
am
PART 3-EXECUTION
go
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, milers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
■
B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. "Fastening Schedule," in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code. .r
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA..
2. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
3. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.5 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
B. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Wall Sheathing: Aluminum-foil-faced, glass-fiber-reinforced, rigid,
cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 1289, Type 1, Class 2.
Foam-plastic core and facings shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
r individually.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Apache Products Company.
b. Celotex Corporation(The); Building Products Division.
C. Rmax, Inc.
C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
2.6 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1,Underlayment single-floor panels.
B. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing.
2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
thick.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners:
+fir 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
pa 2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100.3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not
in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber.
C. Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood sills, sleepers,blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
2. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER .o
A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National
Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. ow
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the
following species:
■A.
1. Mixed southern pine;SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods;NELMA.
3. Northern species; NLGA. A*
C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and the
following species:
1. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA,WCLIB, or WAWA.
2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.4 TIMBER AND MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Blocking. .w
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades: ..es
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Wood framing.
2. Wood supports.
3. Wood blocking.
4. Wood nailers.
5. Wood furring.
6. Wood sheathing.
7. Wood subflooring.
8. Wood underlayment.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current
model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect
for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published
values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
C. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction
Guide: Residential& Commercial."
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1
go
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
W, Northampton, MA
A. Steel:
1. Shop-Primed Steel Finish: Prepare to comply with SSPC-SP 7, 'Brush-off Blast Cleaning"
and apply primer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
OR
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set units
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.
1. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of
steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet(5 mm in 3 m).
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets.
1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
C. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 .3
.a
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA "
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of
metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated
items.
.s.
B. Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed, unless otherwise indicated or
unavoidable, and standard with systems indicated.
C. accessories: Provide radius bends, cast wall brackets and escutcheon plates for complete
assembly.
D. Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section
"Painting.
E. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; with good resistance to
corrosion; and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. ..
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate to design, dimensions, and details indicated,but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
..a
B. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending or inserting prefabricated flush-elbow
fittings.
C. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling,twisting, cracking,
or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
D. Welded Connections: Connect handrail and railing members by welding. Cope and weld or use "R
welded-in fittings. Weld connections continuously.
E. Nonwelded Connections: Connect handrail and railing members with concealed mechanical an
fasteners and fittings.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive. *W
F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Fabricate wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to connect handrails and railings to other work. so
1. Cast or form metal of same material and finish as rails.
an
G. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. am
2.4 FINISHES Aq
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 ,2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 05521 -PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe and tube handrails and railings made of the following:
L Steel.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings:
L Comply with ASTM E 985, based on testing per ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
Z. Capable of withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable
design working stress of materials involved:
a. Top Rail of Guards: Concentrated load of 2001bf(890 N)applied at any point and
!! in any direction, and a uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m) applied horizontally
and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf/ft. (1460 N/m) applied vertically
downward. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act
OR concurrently.
b. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Concentrated load of 200 lbf(890 N) applied
at any point and in any direction, and a uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (730 N/m)
applied in any direction. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to
act concurrently.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, attachments to other
Work.
! '► PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Steel and Iron:
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type F or Type S, Grade A, standard weight(Schedule 40),unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
a. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA AM
1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize
distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion
without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds
smooth and blended.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed «
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of
structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work from structural steel of welded
construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where
wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches (600
mm) o.c.
w�
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-place """►
construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location,with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.
1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces.
B. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. ,
1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting. ..a
END OF SECTION 05500
.w
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
! A. This Section includes the following:
I. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
B. See Division 5 Section"Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to
other Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
�w►
B. Ferrous Metals:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.2 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664 and compatible with finish
paint systems indicated.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with
coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls, of type,
grade, and class required by application indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ...
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units,
waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as .�
fill is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches(450 mm) of finished grade. ..
2. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and
other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owners property.
aw
END OF SECTION 04810
am
ow
so
we
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-6 aw
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing with two metal fasteners of
type indicated.
2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space
between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 24
inches (610) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m)
of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.
3.6 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES,AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. Extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches (50
mm)to form a pan.
2. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing
1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal
flashing termination.
B. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing.
I. Use wicking material to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm)o.c.
3. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has
set.
3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient
strength to resist grout pressure.
I. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout
Placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as
work progresses.
B. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion
and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills,parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other
locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern running; do not use
+wA
units with less than nominal 4-inch(100-mm)horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Existing Work: Tooth in infill areas in existing work. `
3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses and where adjacent to
cells or cavities to be filled with grout. too
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with ■"
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or
slush head joints. so
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated. me
3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
we
A. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement 16" o.c. horizontally. Install with a minimum
cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap
reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). ..
B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated"L" and"T" sections.
as
3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY
no
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-4 am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter, in length
required to produce 24nch (50-mm) exposure on exterior and 18 inches (450 mm) in cavity
between wythes.
2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS
# ! A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium
Polyphosphate and 1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of
water.
2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in
mortar or grout.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, BIA Ml, Proportion Specification.
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
I. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and
pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before
placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible,
cut edges concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-3
..
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA `®
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather ••
construction.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. �*^
C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use .r
aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16(1.18-mm)sieve.
F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
•w
G. Water: Potable.
am
2.4 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials, General: As follows, unless otherwise indicated: WN
1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating for
exterior walls and Class 1 coating for interior walls. aw
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, at exterior walls; and
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip no
process on continuous lines before fabrication at interior walls.
B. Bent Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm)wide, on
made from 3/16-inch-(4.8-mm-) diameter,galvanized steel wire.
C. Adjustable Masonry Veneer Anchors: Provide 2-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal
adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall, for attachment over ON
sheathing to wood or metal studs, and that are capable of withstanding a 100-lbf(445-N)load in
both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3
mm).
1. Screw Attached, Masonry Veneer Anchors: Units with triangular wire tie and rib-stiffened,
sheet metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-stiffened
strap stamped into center to provide a slot for connection of wire tie.
a. Products: .rw
1) Dur-O Wal, Inc.; D/A 213.
2) Heckman Building Products, Inc.; 315-D with 316. ...
3) Hohmann& Barnard, Inc.; DW 10.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
I. Concrete masonry units.
2. Face brick.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Hot-Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90
deg F (32 deg C)with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds
more than 48 inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of
Il�ut spreading mortar.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Exposed Masonry Units: Match existing brick for size and texture.
2.2 MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1. Weight Classification: Lightweight.
B. Brick, General:
I. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and
caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces.
C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216; Type FBS.
I. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:
a. Standard: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm)wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high
by 8 inches (203 mm) long.
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or
membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior
concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen
trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection, and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
40
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's
written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before
float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist with absorptive cover, water saturated
and kept continuously wet.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
t holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
40 END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300.5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
w
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. rw
3.3 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch (6
mm) in height rubbed down or chipped off.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projections.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,
veneer plaster, or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. �`
3.4 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. ■
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies
to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears .w
on the surface.
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 Flo
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
! Northampton, MA
2.3 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94.
I. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
I. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
�'�'► for each additional 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. m).
C. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added.
Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Formwork: Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
B. Vapor Retarder: Install, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643;
place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
2. Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with
mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm)or minus 3/4 inch(19
mm).
C. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice' for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
D. Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
1. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of
concrete, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1 2. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical
surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
4M
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed.
2. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
3. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
C. Concrete Materials: ""
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II or I/II.
2. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1-1/2-inch (38- so
mm) nominal size.
3. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330.
4. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. ON
D. Admixtures:
am
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D.
E. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than
7.8 mils (0.18 mm) thick; or polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm)
thick.
1. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 **
(4.75-mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; complying with
deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
F. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
G. Curing Materials: +*
1. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2,burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf.
2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet. ..�
3. Water: Potable.
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal-weight concrete
determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
a
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3000 psi(20.7 MPa).
2. Slump: 3 inches (75 mm).
ON
a. Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture:
Not more than 8 inches (200 mm) after adding admixture to plant-or site-verified, 2,
to 3-inch(50-to 75-mm) slump.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300,2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. See Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Include details of steel reinforcement placement including material, grade, bar
schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and
protection of in-place concrete.
2. Formwork and form accessories.
3. Steel reinforcement and supports.
4. Concrete mixtures.
5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete.
6. Lightweight concrete.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301.
B. Steel Reinforcement:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Northampton, MA
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Allow testing agency to test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved deg ree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.5 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL
A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill
with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
D. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash,
and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
02300-5
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Utility Trench Backfill: Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous support
for pipes and conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized
excavations.
1. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of
particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility ..,,
pipe or conduit. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final
subgrade.
2. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, �.
except 6 inches (150 mm)below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
B. Fill: Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations.
C. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. .w
1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit
weight.
D. Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose
depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100
mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
E. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to . +
ASTM D 698:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95
percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and w„
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
F. Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations ..�
indicated. Grade lawns, walks, and unpaved subgrades to tolerances of plus or minus 1 inch (25
MM)and pavements and areas within building lines to plus or minus 1/2 inch(13 mm).
G. Subbase and Base Courses: Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared
subgrade. Place base course material over subbase. Compact to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557.
H. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade. Compact to required cross
sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to + +
ASTM D 698.
EARTHWORK 02300-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
D. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions
encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
L If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
B. Excavate for structures, pavements, and walks to indicated elevations and dimensions. Extend
excavations for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other
construction, and for inspections. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base
to receive other work.
L Excavate trenches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation, 6 inches(150 mm)deeper in rock,
4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell
of pipe.
C. Proof roll subgrades, before filling or placing aggregate courses, with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated
subgrades.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities.
E. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
F. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory soil materials,without intermixing, in shaped, graded,
drained, and covered stockpiles. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations and
MM outside drip line of remaining trees.
3.3 BACKFILLS AND FILLS
!W
FM
EARTHWORK 02300-3
..
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA AM
K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
am
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
oft
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or
a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any
dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC,SC,ML,MH, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm)
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm) sieve.
F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1.1/2-inch (38-mm)
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm) sieve.
G. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57;with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch(38-
mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8(2.36-mm)sieve.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other
hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.
EARTHWORK 02300,2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
OPP Northampton, MA
SECTION 02300-EARTHWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
40
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades.
2. Excavating and backfilling.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Base course for asphalt paving.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
aAw
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
Mw H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer
placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk..
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
EARTHWORK 02300- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. ..
B. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted.
Arrange to provide temporary utility services.
3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, grass and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless
further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
w
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
�w
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate
new construction.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, ..c
and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING 02230-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 02230-SITE CLEARING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain.
2. Removing trees and other vegetation.
3. Topsoil stripping.
4. Removing above grade site improvements.
5. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials
shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: As specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not
available on-site.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
SITE CLEARING 02230- 1
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA am
p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply 9M
with requirements for new fixtures.
q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or MJW
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of so
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770 4W
so
..
go
.R
WA
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -6 RM
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
C. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom-clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -5
so
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. .,
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.7 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(115-by-280-mm)paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name,and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially *
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
2. Schedule training with Owner.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
#0 B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
go 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings,where applicable.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment
descriptions, operating procedures, and sequence of operations.
2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance,
and copies of warranties and bonds.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. ..
13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION an
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following: on
I. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for .�
acceptance.
3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment,and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit two copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment,and building systems.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 -2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to,the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
C. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final
Completion construction photographs and negatives.
RN D. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
7. Complete startup testing of systems.
8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction
tools, and similar elements.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1
an
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ON
E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and ...
replace with new materials, if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site. am
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
PM
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -6
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-
suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
B. Existing Facilities: Comply with requirements for using and protecting, stairs, walkways,
building entries,and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.
u
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
W 1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site.
"" 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
WX
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
operations.
00 B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with
an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
'00 D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
40
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways,where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction •
operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building
exterior.
D. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to
limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve
stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to
prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread
of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations.
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Am
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -4
ow
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
12 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in
writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving
areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary
utilities before proceeding with selective demolition that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,
removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility
disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -3
..
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA **
B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition
and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility
services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than
72 hours'notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.
B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. .■,
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by
Owner under a separate contract.
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them *+*
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
w■
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -2
Or
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Wo Northampton, MA
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following:
1. Selected portions of a building or structure.
2. Selected site elements.
3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
C. See Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting,patching, or relocating mechanical items.
40
D. See Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting,patching, or relocating electrical items.
PO 1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged,or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property
and shall be removed from Project site.
on
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed
for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if
proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following:
1. Dust control.
2. Noise control.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
0M Sections of these Specifications.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
RM surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed. •
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
No
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. no
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage ow
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or
abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize '
yp g [minimize] [avoid] interruption of services
to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and ,wr
patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance ..
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations. ■*
I. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
..
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
ON Northampton, MA
SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated
construction.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
D. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. See
Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
OR patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
P4 materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
" CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
on
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
�w
"" EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
I. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure .►
operability without damaging effects.
1. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 4
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove **
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4
RV Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
PP
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
I. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for ..
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered,notify Architect promptly.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels for grading as needed for
layout of the Project. .s
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement,utility slopes, and invert elevations.
C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01700 -EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,
and final cleaning.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1
Awn
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA *•
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
4W
,.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -6
r
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the
Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer)that complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
!" indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
r 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals,to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
4r Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -5
AM
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ow
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, No
that are undamaged and,unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items No
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects. 4W
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make s
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's. an
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish"salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a
single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of
the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with +�,r
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of
an unnamed product.
7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches satisfactorily.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected,even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
10
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
' sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
4-0 ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
PRO warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2-PRODUCTS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 -3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA .,
E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.R
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate '*
contractors,that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as 6W
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and no
installation procedures.
e. Samples,where applicable or requested.
f List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. "�""�
g. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
h. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. on
i. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results. «o
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within so
10 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. 4W
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
we
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
No
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01600 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selecting products for use
in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties;product substitutions; and comparable products.
NO B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
00 facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
00
40
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7
..
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA an
F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof, floor-to-ceiling partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) ..�
studs, 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheets, inside and outside temporary
enclosure. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheets, extending
sheets 18 inches (460 mm)up the side walls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover
floor with 3/4-inch (19-mm) fire-retardant plywood.
G. Temporary Fire Protection: Maintain existing fire-protection facilities to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous
fire-exposure areas.
3. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete
installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place
into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
4. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for 00
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures
to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and
information.
5. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang
hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are
not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. am
3.5 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL „w
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available,
do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities
until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, •
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with
construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
!! C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary
waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements " for progress cleaning requirements.
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,
for each type of waste material to be deposited.
D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar
devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary
facilities.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
! " noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater
from heavy rains.
C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ..�
2. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply
with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities.
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable ..r
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation ,.
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as
equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements .»
without operating entire system.
1. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for
common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate
telephone line for each field office and first-aid station.
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including police and fire
departments, ambulance service, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Engineers'
offices and principal subcontractors' field and home offices. ••
2. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device for use when away from field office.
3. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving
telephone calls when away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
C. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-to
120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
D. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
!fir PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
ww performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent
that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage
ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage
facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose
of effluent off-site in a lawful manner.
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that
40 might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After
heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
sR
C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
PP Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time,when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of ...
temporary service to use of permanent service.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service
during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously
assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
am
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition ow
may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry." am
C. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36, minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)thick by 48 inches (1219 mm)wide
by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. OR
D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. +*"R
E. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
F. Water: Potable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
B. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2
I
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for
temporary facilities and controls.
C. See Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
w 1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, occupants of Project, Architect, testing and
inspecting agencies and personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500, 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures."
K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
ow
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal
to appropriate party.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5
AMM
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA am
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by am
36 inches (600 by 900 mm).
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: ...
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar
characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. e"
Architect will return submittal with options selected.
3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from
the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color
and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete
units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. .
a. Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be
returned. .�
4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. .�
Attach label on unexposed side.
5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. �.
6. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. "
F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. +'�*
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
0" f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
1 ► i. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3
AN"
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA no
1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. MW
2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
3. Allow 7 days for processing each resubmittal.
4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit MW
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches(100 by 125 mm)on label or beside title block
to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
.,
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g•
Name of manufacturer.
h. Unique identifier, including revision number.
L Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents M
on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken ..
and will be returned.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Include Contractors certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
Delegated-Design Submittals.
C. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
- construction activities.
' 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330, 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ..�
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress payment application. map
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such
meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know ...
schedule responsibility.
1. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned ..
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01320
00
am
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4
am*
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. Wheel chair lifts.
b. Plumbing, heating and electrical fixtures and equipment.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
!I�! 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than five days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary
for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect on the schedule of the following:
"t a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
C. Uninterruptible services.
d. Use of premises restrictions.
2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including,but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
! proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, contact the Architect and Owner. Submit a report and a request for
information in writing. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a
reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for
entire construction period. MM
C. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
so
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of ..
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and "
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractors Construction
Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
Substantial Completion.
.eR
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each trade as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the
Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 10 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.
go
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2
am
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
P4
PART 1 -GENERAL
op
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Field condition reports.
4. Construction photographs.
B. See Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
" C. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project
Record Documents at Project closeout.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
NO B. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
C. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
D. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA ...
PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
e.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
r. Working hours.
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings
! ? with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
! ► subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
t appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do
so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
M
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Change Orders.
14) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Smith College Physical Plant.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 7 days of the •�
meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,
at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than seven days after execution of the
Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the
meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
C. Critical work sequencing.
d. Designation of responsible personnel.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. *�*
g. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
h. Submittal procedures.
i. Preparation of Record Documents.
j. Use of the premises.
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
1. Parking availability. ,,W
M. Work, and storage areas.
n. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
o. First aid.
p. Security.
q. Progress cleaning.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01310-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including,but not limited to, the following:
1. General Project coordination procedures.
2. Coordination Drawings.
3. Project meetings.
B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
- 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
po 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
rt 2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final).
4. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final).
5. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
6. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Pa y ment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3
MW
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA „®
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored,but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. ..
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
RM
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as .m
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
MW
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractors Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to ..
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
SECTION 01140-WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to portions of the building as indicated.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and building.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on-site.
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.2 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction
period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied,but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall ,..
be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable
as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3,EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100 ,.
SUMMARY 01100-2
PP Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
RN Northampton, MA
SECTION 01100-SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of Renovations to Hopkins House Basement at Smith
College to create a new lounge space.
1. Project Location: Hopkins House, Elm Street,Northampton, MA.
2. Owner: Trustees of Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated May 12, 2001, were prepared for
Project by Kuhn Riddle Architects.
C. The Work consists of creating an accessible entry with wheel chair lift and interior renovations of
a portion of the basement in Hopkins House.
1. The Work includes limited demolition, earthwork, concrete work, limited masonry and
metal fabrications, extensive architectural casework, general carpentry, metal and
membrane roofing, a few doors and windows, interior finishes including veneer plaster,
ceramic wall tile, acoustic panel ceilings, resilient flooring, carpet and painting, a wheel
chair lift and plumbing, heating and electrical work.
2. The Work must be completed by August 21, 2001.
D. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1.2 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations, including use
of Project site, during construction period. Contractors use of premises is limited by Owner's
occupancy of portions of the building.
1. The Work must be scheduled to allow residents of the building continued use of the
!" facilities. Certain activities will be allowed only during restricted times in order to limit
disruption.
1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-
division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat' numbering system.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
4
SUMMARY 01100- 1
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton,MA ..■
08711......... Door Hardware..................................................................................................................... 6
08814.........Mirrored Glass...................................................................................................................... 4 ,.
DIVISION 9-FINISHES
09215.........Gypsum Veneer Plaster........................................................................................................ 5
09310.........Ceramic Tile......................................................................................................................... 3
09511.........Acoustical Panel Ceilings..................................................................................................... 3
09651.........Resilient Floor Tile............................................................................................................... 3 ..,
09652.........Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings................................................................................................ 4
09680......... Carpet................................................................................................................................... 2
09912.........Painting(Professional Line Products).................................................................................. 6
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10100.........Visual Display Boards........................................................................................................... 3
10801.........Toilet and Bath Accessories................................................................................................. 3
DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT
11451......... Residential Appliances................................................................................................. 3
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
12356......... Kitchen Casework
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14420.........Wheelchair Lifts 5
DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL
15300......... Fire Protection...................................................................................................................... 22 r.M
15400......... Plumbing............................................................................................................................... 15
15600......... Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC)......................................................... 38
DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL
16100......... Electrical............................................................................................................................... 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
Renovations to Hopkins Basement
Smith College
Northampton, MA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division.....Section Title..........................................................................................................................Pages
DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100.........Summary............................................................................................................................... 2
01140.........Work Restrictions ................................................................................................................ 1
01290......... Payment Procedures............................................................................................................. 3
01310.........Project Management and Coordination.............................................................................. 4
01320.........Construction Progress Documentation............................................................................... 4
.. 01330.........Submittal Procedures........................................................................................................... 5
01500.........Temporary Facilities and Controls...................................................................................... 7
01600......... Product Requirements......................................................................................................... 6
01700.........Execution Requirements...................................................................................................... 5
01731.........Cutting and Patching........................................................................................................... 3
01732.........Selective Demolition............................................................................................................ 6
01770.........Closeout Procedures............................................................................................................. 6
DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION
02230.........Site Clearing.....................:................................................................................................... 2
02300.........Earthwork............................................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 3-CONCRETE
03300.........Cast-in-place Concrete.......................................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04810.........Unit Masonry Assemblies.................................................................................................... 6
DIVISION 5-METALS
05500.........Metal Fabrications............... ...... 2
05521.........Pipe and Tube Railings........................................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 6,WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100......... Rough Carpentry.................................................................................................................. 5
06200......... Finish Carpentry................................................................................................................... 2
06402.........Interior Architectural Woodwork........................................................................................ 10
DIVISION 7,THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07142......... Hot Fluid-applied Waterproofing........................................................................................ 3
07210......... Building Insulation............................................................................................................... 3
07610.........Sheet Metal Roofing............................................................................................................. 5
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110.........Steel Doors and Frames....................................................................................................... 3
08211.........Flush Wood Doors............................................................................................................... 2
08550.........Wood Windows................................................................................................................... 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
NIP
PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATIONS TO HOPKINS BASEMENT
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
May 11, 2001
Kuhn Riddle Architects,Inc.
7 North Pleasant Street
Amherst,MA 01002
(413) 259-1630
fax(413) 259-1621
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers
Lindgren&Sharples
96 Industry Avenue
Springfield,MA 01104
(413)732-4336
(413) 731-0786
po
Pw
O
. .,:j ,
l5 Q U
i M AY 2 4 2001 Fl,
DEPT Of BUILDING INSPECTIONS
TOkMA 01060
PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATIONS TO HOPKINS BASEMENT
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
May 11, 2001